JPRS ID: 8958 TRANSLATION FUNADAMENTALS OF TELEPHONY AND THE MULTIPLEXING OF CITY TELEPHONE CICUITS BY TS. L. TARASOVA AND A.S. KORNEYEV

• Document Type: CREST
• Collection: JPRS
• Document Number (FOIA) /ESDN (CREST): CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
• Release Decision: RIF
• Original Classification: U
• Document Page Count: 146
• Document Creation Date: November 1, 2016
• Sequence Number: 60
• Content Type: REPORTS

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~ ~s oF Mu~ ~ ~ aF
C I TY TELEPHONE C I RCU I TS BY TS. L. TRRRSO~R RND R. S. KORNEYE ~

29 FEBRUARY 1980 CFOUO) ~Z OF 2
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- i~OR OFFK'IAL USE ONLY
JPRS L/8958
29 February 1980 -
- Translation . -
- Fundamentals of ;~elephony and the M~ultiplexing o~f =
= City Telephone Circuots ~
BY -
- Ts. L. ~arasova and A. S. Korneyev
- Fgs~ ~OREIGN BROADCAS~ INFOR(4~IATION SERVICE -
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY ~
a
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- NOTE -
JPRS publications contain information primarily from foreign
newspapers, periodisals and books, but also from news agency
transmissions and broadcasts. Materials from foreign-language ~
sources are translated; those from English-language sources
~ are transcribed or reprinted, with the original phrasing and
~ other characteristics retsined.
- Headlines, editorial reports, and material enclosed in brackets _
- are supplied by JPRS. Processing indicators such as [Text]
or [Excerpt] in tae first line of each item, or following the
last line of a brief, indicatA how the original informa.tion was
- processed. Where no processing indicator is given, the infor-
mation was summarized or extracted.
Unfamiliar names rendered phoneticall}- or transliterated are
enclosed in parentheses. Words or names preceded by a ques-
tion mark and enclosed in parentheses were not clear ir? the
original but have been supplied as appropriate in context.
Other unattributed parenthetical notes with in the body of an
- item originate with the source. Times within items are as
given by source. _
_ The contents of this publication in no way represent the poli- -
: cies, views or attitudes of the U.S. Government. -
For f:.arther information on report content
call (703) 351-2938 (economic); 3468
(political, sociological, military); 2726 _
(life sciences); 2725 (physical sciences).
COPYRIGHT LAWS AND REGULA.TIONS GOVERNING OWNERSHIP OF
MATERIALS REPRODUCED HEREIN REQUIRE THAT DISSEMINATION -
OF THIS PUBLICATION BE RESTRICTED FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY. -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
! FOR OFFICIP,L USE ONLY
- JPRS L/8958
29 February 1980 -
_
FUNDAMENTALS OF TELEPHONY AND THE MULTIPLEXING OF
CITY TELEPHQNE CIRCUI~'S
Moscow aSNOVY TELEFONI I KABEL'NYKH TSEPEY GTS in Ruasian 1973
= pp 126-261..
Chapters 6-9 of book by Ts. L. Tarasova and A. 5. Korneyev,
' Svyaz' Publisher~ -
- CONTENTS PAGE
_ CHAYTER 6. KRR-M Multiplexing Equipment 2
CHAPTER 7. ICRR-T (KAMA) Equipment 63
~ CHAPTE~2 8. Use of Pulse-Code Modulation in~ Mult~�plexing Equipment..... 106
CHAPTER 9. Relay Assemblies of MultipZexed Trunks 107
-
, ?
~ - a - [z - USSR - F k'OUO]
~ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~
;
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
PUBLICATION DATA
English title : FUNDAMENTALS OF TELEPHO~IY AND THE
MULTIPLEXING OF CITY TELEPHONE CIRCUITS
_ ~
Rus$ian title : OSNOVY TELEFONI I KABEL'NYKH TSEPEY GTS
- Author (s) ; Ts. L. Tarasova and A. S. Korneyev
Ed:itor (s) . _
Publishing House : Svyaz'
- Place of Publication : Moscow
Date of Publication ; 1973
Signed to press .
Copies ,
COPYRIGHT . Izdatel'stvo "Svyaz'," 1973
= - 1 -
FOR OFFICIAL U~E ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
P'UK Ur'r1l:lAL US~; UNLY
CHAPTER 6. KRR-M MULTIPLEXING EQUIPMENT
[Text~ 6.1. General Information _
The KRR-M multiplexing equipment is a version of the KRR equipmant. It is
installed on the city and suburban telephone network and is designed for
the formation of 30-frequency telephone channels on each connecting cable
pair laid between two automatic telephone exchanges. The equipment permits
not only economical use of the physical circuits of this cable, but it also
insures the required norms with respect to attenuation of the signal on the
~ local telephone communications networks. The equipment is used to multiplex
the symmetric circuits with MKS cordel-styroflex in~ulation, and depending
- on its capacity (1.4 or 7 quads) it permits organization of 60, 240 or 420
channels respectively. The maximum communications range over the trunks
formed by the KRR-M equipment ~s 8Q km c�rith six repeate* sections with an
average length of 13 km each.
'The KRR-M equipment is a multichannel high-frequency telephony system with
- frequency division of the channels, and it operates as a single-cable, two-
band system containing type A and B offices. The frequency band from 12 to
248 kilohertz is used to transmit the currents of the 30-channel group in
the direction from off ice A to off ice B; from office B to off ice A, the
- 312 to 548 kilohertz band is used. The ch~nnels are amplitude-modulated;
the effectively transmitted frequency band is 300 to 3400 hertz. Upper side-
band frequency currents are used for transmission to the line. The lower
- sideban.d is suppressed during modulation of the phase difference circuit
_ by no less than 25.2 decibels (2.9 Nepers) by comparison with the usable -
sideband. Such comparatively small suppression of the undesirable sidebared
currents prevents its use for transmitting currents of the adjacent channel
with respect to spectrum as a result of the possibility of cross*_alk between
the channels. Therefore the width of one channel in the KRR-M equipment
- cannot be equal to the width of only one frequency sideband (approximately
4 kilohertz), and a frequency range equal to the width of two sidebands,
that is, 8 kilohertz, is allotted in the linear spectrum for each channel.
- The channel carrier can be calculated by.�ieh~ formula FH=304+8n, where n is _
the channel number, and it is equal to 312 kilohertz for the first channel,
320 for the second channel, and so on. The carrier frequency current on -
the transmitting side of the current is suppressed by no less than 14.8 deci-
bels (1,7 Nepers) by tY~e balancing converter circuit, and it is regenerated
on the receiving end.
2
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY ~
For tranamiasion of the interaction aignals there is a segregated signal
channel 100 hertz wide. The average frequency of thia channel of 3800 hertz
is called the signal frequency. The current level of the signal channel ie -
5.22+1.74 decibels (0.6+0.~ Nepere) below the current level of the apeaking
channel. -
In addition to individual frequency coaversion which takes place on the
tranemitting and receiving end of each channel, the ItRR-M equipment also
hae a group conversion atage by meana of which the frequeMCy spectrum from
3];2 to 548 kilohertz ia converted to the apectrum from 12 to 248 kilohertz
in the group transmission channel of office A and the 12-248 kilohertz
spectrum ia converted to 312-548 kilohertz spectrum in the group receiving
_ channel of station B. These proces~ea are realized by meana of the 550 _
kilohertz group carrier frequency. After group conversion the channela at. -
office A are inverted, that ie, they are reversed with reapect to their _
- arrangement in the spectrum of office B. The frequency distribution of the
30 channels in the linear apectra of offices A and B is illustrated in _
Fig 6.1. The group carrier is not transmitted to the line.
_ J11 ~ J20 3?B . . S?8 . S36 s44 s47d
~ 6-�A
- e.
~ ~ ~
~1,~ ~ i 2 ,3 CueNanaNOa ?8 ,?9 d0 NKO Q�~ 3
E , vOCmamO
. , ~2~ � .
- 1 f6 . .14 32 . ?3? ~ ?40 ?48 ' -
- e r1,1 A -'b
c r ~
s ~ d~ . 79 18 Cuzf,anbHa ~ ~ f h'XG
Q/IQ ~3
(1) � yaCma.mR . � �
_ . . (2~
Figure 6.1. Frequency distribution of 30 channela in th~: linear
transmiasion spectra of ~ffices A and B _
Key:
1. Amplitude
2. Signal frequency
- 3. f, kilohertz, N channels
The frequency of 8 kilohertz which is used to synchronize the generating
equipment of both offices is tranamitted over the group channel in t~?e
_ A-~B direction together with the frequency band of 12-248 kilohertz.
The low-~requency terminals of the talking channel (the tranemitter input.
and the receiver output) have a res~.etance of 600 ohme; the group channel -
~unctions have a rssistance of 75 ohms, and the wave impedance of the
cable circuit in the operating frequency range of the equipment is
160 ohms.
3
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FoR or'FICIAL US~ UNLY ,
- In addition to the MKS cables, the KRR
M equipment can be used for operation
over the TZ type cable with cordel-paper insulation and also for multiplexing
- the trunks of the radio relay systems.l
The multiplexing of the circuits of ordin~ry paired city telephone cables _
- with paper insulation (type T cables) by the standard KRR--M equipment, with
the construction of group equipment with respect to the two-band system
and with an upper transinittable frequency of 548 kilohertz, does not appear
to be possible as a result of the high attenuation constant and also -
insufficient protection against crosstalk of such cables on frequencies -
above 250 kilohertz. For multiplexing such circuits, the terminal group _
' equipment is altered so that the operation is over a two-cable system with -
transmission of one frequency band from 12 to 248 kilohertz in both direc-
tions, and transistorized repeaters with a gain of 21.75 decibels (2.5 nepers)
. were used as the intermediate repeaters. These repeaters can be uncontrolled
~ (NUP [uncontrolled re~ea~er stations]) and installed in th~ cable manholes.
This construction of the tierminal and intermediate equipment permits multi-
- plexing of a large number of type T cables previously laid in the city, and
it does not require that the streets be torn up to lay new cables if the
_ possibilities of the existing conduits have been exhausted. '
It is inexpedient to use the KRR-M type equipment on the long-distance cable
- lines as a result oP the wide frequency band allotted for one channel. The
_ equipment requ3res the application of expensive quartz or magnetostrictive
filters having steep attenuation buildup characteristics after the pass band -
in the individual channel equipment. These filters suppress the currents
of the frequency sideband not used in the given channel by 50-60 decibels.
This permits the use of this sideband to transmit the currents of the
ad~acent channel with respect to spectrum, limiting the spectrum of one
channel to a width of 4 kilohertz. This construction of the individual
units of the multiplexing system increases che cost of the terminal equip-
ment, but it also lowers the cost of the intermediate equipment inasmuch
as it does not require frequent installation of intermediate repeater sta- _
tions along the communication line as when using the phase-difference system
of suppressing one frequency sideband. The cost of the intermediate repeater ,
stations is the most significant index of the total cost of the equipment
installed on long main communication lines.
1The trunk of a radio relay syste~ is a wide-band radio channel which uses
the frequency band and can combine a large number o~ channels and group -
channels formed by any multiplexing equipment. When using the KRR
M
equipment the trunk of the.radio relay system combines two group channels, _
_ that is, 60 channels.
- 4
FOR OF~'~ICIAL USE ONLY ~
- 1~".I v :1Gt1� ~t1i1Ut a'ii1 nci�i ~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONTLLY
_ 6.2. Circuit Diagrams of the KRR-M on the City Telephone Trunka
= The KRR-M equipment is inatalled on the trunks between the automatic tele-
- phone offices and also between the sutomatic telephone office and long-
distance off ice. When organizing a trunk between Cwo automatic offices -
the KRR-M equipment can be included in any selection atage between the
IGI [I Group Selector] and the LI [connectorJ and on the trur.k between an
automatic office and a long-distance office, on any aelection stage between
~ IGIM and LIM.1 The versions of the circuit diagrams of the multiplexing
equipment between the IGI and IIGI selectors are presented in Fig 6.2.
~1) (2) ~3) (4) ~D4~~C~d Utt~ ~~~~~n~l)
W nN ~rHpcnyn Kav~ a
- .c~~~ -[}-{]---,~)..~}.~,~~~g , -
c 2>.
b'~ (lU~N (11~ KDP~4~~4~ XDP�M Al~rr� QfN ~ AN ( 0
`i l~ F={~ N~[R _cn _ WX _
~ ~ ' (14 c a
' ~ 2 er.p~19 ~N AC~9N ~ ~ 4~B 6 fK ~8~,~ 9nA '
AN 3~ (2) arcK KaaM_cn ) rraaa ac~iy~d ~
~ ~K -~}-C}-'~}~~~~~~~- �
c
A B ONA B' NP '
(20) PEZ. (1:8~ P~"IIyB ,
. d 3 ~ RN !fN PCll9N A'00-M � ffPP-M ATCB (13 ~ Q~ ( AN 1~ ~
1~~J'i LyJ�IJ - l-~7 ~ 1 BI( 14ff ~ .
en ~ a:14,) p C B A
~ Figure 6.2. Various layouts for connecting the automatic off ices
of various systems through the KRR equipment channels
Key:
- 1. LI = connector 13. RSLW ATSK = RSLW for
2. IGI = I group.selector conn~ction to the crossbar
3.. RSLUI = outgoing multiplex trunk system
reluy 14. VShK = incoming plug connector
4. KRR-M 15. ~KI = outgoing connection
5. SL = trunk 16. PVK = incoming connection
- 6. RSLW = incoming multiplexed 17. VRD = incoming register
trunk relay group 18. IRD = outgoing regieter
7. IIGI selector ~9. RI
- 8. IIIGI = selector , 20. Regis:ex
_ 9. IVGI = aelector
10. AI
11. IShK = outgoing plug connector
12. RSLUT ATSK = RSLUI for connection to the crr,ssbar ayatem
1[Translator's note: M probably refers to long-distavtce GI and LI
respectively.] _
- 5
FOR OFFICZAL USE ONLY -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR ~F'F7cTAT, TTSF. nxr,Y _
_ As the matching connector, outgoing and incoming multiplexed trunk relays
- are installed: RSLUI and RSLW for matching with the ten-step equipment,
RSLUI and RSLUV ATSK for matching with the crossbar system and RSLUIM and
RSLUVM (RSLUIM and RSLUVM ATSK) on the trunks connecting with the long-
~ distance office.
For connecting two ten-step systems (Fig 6.2a) the outgoing RSLUI is
connected to the IGI selector bank, and the incoming RSLW is connected to
the IIGI wipers. When connecting two ATSK [crossbar systems] (Fig 6.2b)
the outgoing system is connected to the IGI selector bank, and the incoming
- system is connected to the vertical of the IIGI selector. Figuies 6.2c and d
sh~w the outgoing coupling from the crc~ssbar system to the ten-step system
and from the ten-step system to the crossbar system. In the former case,
- the outgoing RSLU [multiplexed trunk relay] is connected to the output of
the outgoing conn~:ction PKI, and the incoming relay, to the IIGI selector _
wipers of the ten-step system. In the latter case, instead of the outgoir_g, _
the incoming connector PVK is installed on the cross-bar system. The PVK -
is connected to the incoming RSLU relay assembly. The PKI and PKV asse~nblies
together with the outgoing and incoming registers IRD and VRD are needed for _
matched operation of the cross-bar system *aith the ten-step system.
.
The connectio*~s of the automatic offices and the long-distance offices do
not differ theoretically from those presented with the exception of the
fact that instead of the ordinary type GI group selectors, the long-distance
selectors GIM are used, and when organizing the trunl~ between the selector
and connector the relay assemblies RSLU are connected not to the LI [conriector],
_ but to the LIM [long-distance connector].
6.3. Composition of the Equipment an~i the Structural Peculiarities of the
- KRR-M ~quipment
- The F~tR-M equipment includes the terminal and intermediate repeater bays.
The former are called individual-group equipment bays and are made in two
types: SIC~ 1M and SIG-30M, and the latter are called intermediate repeater
bays SPU, which, depending on the type of feed, are also made in two types:
SPU-2M with local feed and SPU-2D with remote feed. A S-0,9 f erroresonance
voltage stabilizer is attached to each SIG-1M bay.
The external appearance of the KRR-M equipment bays is presented in Fig 6.3. -
In addition to the SIG-1M and the SIG-30M bays, the RSLU frames are installed
in the terminal off ice: These frames contain plates with the trunk and
differential system relays called the RSLU plates or the RSL-DS plates. _
In additi.on to the enumerated equipment, high-frequency cable boxes are
installed at the terminal and tandem of~ices: one at the terminal office,
and two at the tandem office. The boxes are made in two types: BM-2 for
the four-quad 4x4 cables and BM-3 for the seven-quad 7x4 cables.
The amount of equipment requirec? depends on the capacity of the multiplexed
cable. When calculating the equipment for the terminal offices we begin
with the fact that three.SIG-30M bays can operat~ jointly with each SIG-1M
6
FOR OEEI~.IAI....USE_.ONLY... _
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
I
= FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY ~ ~
- bay. This set of equipment providea for the organization of 120 channels, .
for the repeating of whick? at the tandem off ice it is necessary to inst~ll _
- two SPU-2M or SPU-2D bays, for each of them contains two repeater atations
each. One cable paix is run to each repeater atation, that is, 30 channels
each. The number of trunk relay frames is selected calculating 20 RSLU -
relay assemblies or 30 RSLU ATSK assemblies for each frame. Fig 6.4 ahows
' a simplif ied diagram of rhe required equipment foY multiplexing four cabl~
= pairs for the case of coupling the KRR-M equipment to the ten-step syatem.
_ The SIG-1M and SICr30M bays are put tog~ether as followa.
The SIG-1M bay contains 3~J-channel transceivere formed on the first cable
pair; the group equipment ie common to theae 30 channels; the generating
equipment for the 120 channels, that is, for foar 30-chaanel syatems;
120 static relays; electr:ic power supply equipment; common eignal, protective
and input devices for the 120 channels.
The SIG-30M bay is auxi~i3ry individual group equipment and it cannot be -
- used independently without the SIG-1M bay, for there is no generating equip-
ment or other common station equipment in it. The SIG-30M contains only
30 transceivers, the group equi~pment and power aupplies common to them.
The switching of the SIG-1M and ISir-30M bays with the automatic office
~ assemblies through the RSLU adapter is carried out as follows (see Fig 6.4
and 6.5). From the GI selector bank it goes through three wires a, b, c to
each RSLU relay assembly; hence, after passing through the differential
systems to the SIG-1M or SIG-30M bay it goes through six wires to each
channel: two to transmission, two to r eception of the talking channel and -
one each to transmission and reception of the signal channel (a ground is
used as the second wire in the signal chann~el). From each SIG-1Ai or SIG-30M -
bay it goes to the high-frequency boxes over one pair each of the high-
frequency cable. On passing through the r~peater stations (if they exist), _
in the second terminal office this pair is run to the box in the same way,
and hence to the SIG-1M or SIG-30M bays of the off ice. The difference liea _
- only in the fact that whereas at the first terminal office the type A bays -
are installed (SICf 1M-A and SIG-30M-A), at the second terminal office type B
bays are installed (SIG-IM-B and SIG-30M-B), and instead of the RSLUI, the
RSLW is installed. From the RSLW assembly it goes through three wires
a, b and c to the group selector wipers of the subse~uent selection stage.
A characteristic feature of the design of the KRR-M equipment is the small
size of the units, universality of their manufacture and aimplicity of
replacement. A1.1 the equipment is placed in the modules and plates and is
installed on the bottoms o~ the bays ~neulated.from the frame. The wiring -
of the bay is placed in the side panels of the frame and in the inside
- cavities of the bottom, from which it goea to apecial five-receptacle blocks
which are fastened to the bottom. These same five-receptacle blacks
_ fastened to the face panel are used to terminabethe module installation. _
- 7
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/48: CIA-RDP82-44850R000200054460-8
rvn urrt~.lcsu u~u vua+i
_
O
~ c~1
~ ~ C'+ ~ cE F+
, . O O r~l ~ e-i w P~1
N v v
~ v N r~l ~d cd ~ O cr1 'b ~ O
a~ ~ v
~ G~ I V N~~+ Rf O r~l ~ td
- ^ U Ej ca~ ~O G~l G~) i.r Ul w.f. ral V~
~ . pC v
v C d ~ O i.i t~y~ ~ N~+ iYi ~ C .-~1
' R~ = W ~ CJ p+ Cl I P~ Cl ~ c~
- ~ ~ aada o+~n ~ ~ F
~ a,a,s~c~z~~' i a~~
~ ^ , ~ ^ ~ c~ ~ ~e a ~ ~ o ~
~o c e ~ o a~ ~ a .v .v a p v H a~
~ w ~o v v
- O~ O O c~ O eQV Q h~ tl~ Z ~ri N tY1 .f V] W fli t!) V) 00 N
. ~ ~ ~ ~ tll ~ ~ ~ 4 ~ ~ ~ZGw� S 1J
` ` N L eO ~p U ty a~ y~LY ~ ,--1
' V~ ~`.v ~ ~Za~ ~ I~Z~ ~ ~ Q~ O .-i N M ~7 u'1 ~D f~
~ O ~-1 NNNNNNN N
~ O
r~ ~ v 1~
~ . ~ ~ ~ . rl � b C+
M = y O
-v_ __-'qUa~DN ~ o ~ ~
_ ~
~ ~ ~ a ~ a,
~ ,g ~ ~ N ~ a ~ u cn
~ N T b+ O �~-~I
W 3-1
yr ~ w N
~ ~IQI~ ~IQ ~Q v ~ 'd ~ O
~ ' G q R d I i~ " ~ N~-1 1~ r-I r-1
a, 6~-,I ~I ~ a, a o~~a a.�1u
~ Q"iQ ~,I ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~,zN
. a
~ a 1~ tU N O ~ ppS .a 5E a
~ v^ ~ ~ ~N ~N~HfAUf~A~.-~1 A
~--I ~ Z r~-I a ~ P+
b ._1~ ~ ^ ~ _ . . . . .
_ Qu'aQD~_ a~ o ri cv r~ ~ ~ri ~c ~ o0
- - - o ~ r-I r-I '-I ~-1 r-I ~ ~-1 r-1 r-1
i~ c~
- ~'-1 ~ ~ ^ , cd
v ~O ~
. ~ ~ v N p~p ~ ~
ai v ~ cd Vl
Q .c~ ~y.1 c ~ . 4 a~: a~.~ G ~
p ~ q c5 ~ cGi.-. c~'i ~ h ai ~ d o4 Q b~, N O
~n s d. sa r~ Uz~ io`y~,~~,oi ~ m p A~~~.. o~'o.~nx
v~, v`. G~... Z`. ~ d ~
~ ~ ~ a~.i 1~.~ ~ o ~ cC 1~+ 1~
- ~a u ~n b~+ u a
- i mc~i a~~~~vo~M~,~a
c~..i b ' ~ u 3 3 cd ^ r7 b y~
a~. o o . w c
i cn .~G u~ t~ D o a~ v~
R ~ ~ ~O A j~ ~ p~ ~t 4d Q'~ o r-1 v 1-+ d^
`O ~ a `a b~ � O 00 00 ~ cd 4-t pp tI~
C~a ~ ~~NO N ~iO~~1+Ci~~~~G ~
~ ~ v , rn ~ ~ ~ ~ a.~i U v~ ~ ~ ~ q ~ cd ~
�c ~ pp Cj A cr1 rl LL cA 1+ ~
� ~ ~ ~ Z , Fi ~ O ~1 tA C9 C.7 O O
� N cr1 d' r-I rl LYi cA cJ~ t~f) N r-I Ch ~--1
..i v
. . . . .
rl N t+1 ~t U'1 ~G I~ 00
~
N.
~
8 .
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
~For electriczl connection of the module to the bays there are five-pronged
~umpers. Some of the plates are connected by the same ~umpere. All of the -
modulea have shields. Modules af two types and aizes are uaed in the
- equipment: 75x190x246 aun3 and 75x93x246 mm3, which are inatalled three
and six each on one tray regpectively. In addition, on the SIG-1M bay -
~ there are plate blocks with nonatandard etructural form. These are the
static relay and input plates. These platea are connected to each other
- and to the outside mounting by wiring leada terminating in the 30-contact :
- cut-in boxea. The same boxes are used to terminate the bay wiring of the
circuits to which these plates are connected. The generating equipment ia
also made in the form of a plate the PITGO plate.
The transceiver module is built from printed circuitry and containe minia- _
ture parts. ~he amplif ier, the modulators arid the demodulator of the =
module are transistorized. Small eiements are also used in other equipment -
junctions: ferrite-core armored inductance coils (OB-12, OB-20), trans-
formers wi~h Sh-type cores (OSh-0303; ~Sh-05075; OSh-0707; OSh-1215) and _
= toroidal cores, semiconducting diodes and transistors, and the ULM, SP and -
other types of resiRtors. '
_ In the group repeater and generating equipment modules, the 6Zh1P, 6P3S
and 6P9 electronic tubes are used.
6.4. Principle of Formation of a Multichannel Signal and Transmission of -
= It Over the Group Channels of the Terminal Offices -
Each terminal office type A or B contains group and individual equipment
(~ig 6.5). The individual equipmQnt, that is, the equipment of each channel,
includes t:~e relay-awftching circuitry with differential system (RSLU
assembly), the individual ~requency conversion devices (modulator and de-
modulator) pYaced in the IIII transceiver module (the receiver and transmiCter ~
are depicted separately in the figure) and the circuits providing for the
transmission and reception of the control and interaction signals: s*_atic
relsys on transmission and the PSU control signal receiver on reception ~f
the signal channel. The individual channel Pquipment and process of forma~
' tion of the multichannel group signal are identical for officea A and B,
and it takes place in the following way. For subscriber talking, the audio-
frequency currents with a level of -13.05 decibels (-1.5 neper) go from the -
automatic office circujts through the RSLU assembly to the channel input.
By using a differential system executed in the form of a bridge, to the
different diagonals of which the channel transmitter and receiver are
connected, the transition is made from the two-wire low-�requency channel _
- to the four-wire channel of the.multiplexing equipment. The carrier fre- -
quency F,~ corresponding.to the channel number ia �ed continuoualy from the
generator equipment to the same modulator. As a result of modulation at
_ the transmitter output, the upper sideband currents are formed (the lower
sideband currents and the carrier are auppressed during the modulation
process).
9
- FOR OFFICIAL U~E ONLY
~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02148: CIA-RDP82-00850R040240050060-8
r�ux ur�r�t~lAa,, u~~ uNLx . ~
Inasmuch as the carriers are high-frequency oscillations from 312 to 544
kilohertz with an interval o~ 8 kilohertz, when taZking over 30 channels
tlie audio-frequencies from 0.3 to 3.4 kilohertz, modulating these carriers, _
are converted to the high-frequency spectrum from 312.3 to 547.4 kilohertz. -
' Let us explain ttxis in the example of calculating the sidebands of certain _
~ channels.
Ctiannel No 1. Tt-ie carrier FH1=304+8�1=312 kilohertz. The upper sideband
Fg b is obtained as a result of addition of rhe carrier and the eff ectively
_ transmitted voice frequert.r.; band O.:i to 3.4 ki'iohertz. Fg b=312+(0.3-3.4)= _
312.~ to 315~4 kilohertz.
Channel No 2. The carrier FHZ 304+8.2=320 kilohertz. The upper sideband -
_ FB b=320+(0.3 to 3.4)=320.3 to 323.4 kilohertz. -
Channel No 30. FH30-304+8�30=544 kilohertz. FBb=544+(0.3 to 3.4)=544.3 to
547.4 kilohertz.
Thus, on the common input of the group equipment of ehe system a multichannel
signal was formed which takes up the spectrum from 312.3 to 547.7 kilohertz, _
, and considering a frequency of 3.8 kilohertz on which the interaction
signals are transmitted, to 547.8 kilohertz or rounded from 312 to 548 -
kilohertz. The transmission le�~el of this signal is -50.46 decibels
- (-5.8 nepers) on a resistance af 75 ahms.
: The group channels of offices A and B are different in view of the fact
- th3t the KRR-M equipment operates by the two-band system. _
The auxiliary repeater BY~Z1 with average gain of 5.6 decibels (1.8 nepers)
is at the transmission channel input of the A office. The purpose of the
repeater is preamplif ication of the group signal to the level required for _
_ normal operation of the group frequency converter in this channel. The
- output level of the repeater is -32.5 decibels (-4.05 nepers). From the
output of the auxiliary repeater the group signal goes to the D-552 low-
frequency filter. The filCer suppresses all the interference frequencies
going beyond the limits 'of the operating spectrum of the equipment, by
_ which overloading of the group converter is pr~vented. In the converter -
- the frequency band of 312 to 548 kilohertz is shifted to the 12-248 kilo- -
hertz range using the 560 kilohertz group carrier. -
The converter is assembled from diodes in a ring circuit. As a result of
the simultaneous e~f ect of the 312-548 kiloherzz spectrum and the 560 kilo-
hertz carrier, two modulation sldebands are ~ormed:
upper sideband Fgb=560-I-(312-548)=872-1108 ki~.ohertz,
lower sideband. F~b=560-(312-548)=12-248 kilohertz. "
IIn Fig 6.5, the repeaters for the lower group of frequencies from 12 to
- 248 kiloh~Ltz have the index 1, and the upper group from 312 to 548 kilo-
hertz, the index 2. '
= 10
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
_ r... ,
� . ~ .
� ^ � ~ 4! P~i .C
, ~ i'1 N., t~ G~l d~
et ai ~ v1'' , ' C7 ~j O rl C! O
1~ ~ � ~ Qv ~ k oZi ~ ~ ~G) i.J +O,? ~ W ~
, . a ~ a ~v w i
,~,Q � ~ i~~u i P� I
~ , ~ ~ ~ ~ v~ ar ~ ~ a~ '
~ ~ - - + , ~ I ~ H ri ~ ~ N
i C ~y ~ ` a~ ~ ~CZ~ ~ ~1 ~F ~q N N
. oo ~-1 Q~a . e ~ H c~J a~a ~ w q
r-I ~ � Lj Gl ~ t~ O H q
~ ~iV' aD ' ri. oC ~y.~~ C! ci~7 N~~ _
~ ' a"~ C l R! r l G ~ ~ ~-I U
� ~ ~ �u~ ~ = O i~ ~a , ^ 'J 1~ ~ v N r~
- ~ m ' CCl N O O QO'L7 ~ w V
~ ~ ~ � ~y'+ a~ ~i . ~o y u ~ N C ~ p~i a~i -
~ a? a ao a
, ~~i
_ ~ ~ ~ I` ~ ~4-~i H N ~ ~ cqd .c ~
V ` . : ~ ~ ~ $ ~ .,a ~ w oo a~ H
~o E' E � I N'-~ o" o
. ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ i �
~ 2 ~~4v~ ~ Ic~ ~ ~
. lU g ~ ~n ~ ao
~------------~~�n.~ f-1 ~ ri t+'1N
~ ~ _ _ ~ ~ ^ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~.t - ' ~ .j~ ~ ^ ~ ~ _ ~ ~ G1 v1 � ~ N -
' lv ~ ' . ~ ~y o~;~N~~ -
Z ~ ti a,
~Q ~ . . . . o � ~ ~ ~i~~ ~ ~ ~a ~
- ' y e ~ ~ M 4-1 ~N ~ N ~N U CHl ~ W
h ~ b 4~ ' ~~7 c~r1 O f~l H.C �ri y( 4-Ip -
Q i.~ U J~ f: t~
- 2. ~~.f ~ o I~ r' ~ ~ ' ~ I ~ ta/~ 0pl ai V N I -
~7 ~ v v v Z ~i d ~ ~
yv`~C r. 1 ~Z n~tl' � ~e ~ ~i ~ D,M ~ O~D~GI ~
. ~ a~ Ct ^~'a iCS C3 r"'~ CO O 4~ ~-1 U y
, ~ 0e =
- . ~ C n x Z h - cd ~C.1{ ~ r-i I G1 -
~ v"~'tl ,a.'`~u~ ~ ~ :.7 ~ C~J Aj ~ ~ ~ -
ci' , ~tr ~ C. . N i ~
- v ~ e~~ v e ~ ~ ~ ~i ~ ~ S ~ N I d _
~ ~~-s E~~ M y~ a C i.~ ~~�r~l r~i r-~I N N
C ~ b ~ ~ ~
r~ ~ h ~ ~ ~ _ ~ _ c4~ ~'i~ N ~ .w ~ 1-1 'i~ ~
, ~ u'1 ~ I ~ ~ 00 u ~ r~l
~ ~ �
_ ~ ' + Z a ~p N ~ ^ a.J M ~ ~
� � ~.C y b ~ M ~ I ~ V~1 ~ .
~ ^A .
'~T1!/1JN,D~Y'H?l7~DhDQ7fl9// v y~4' D!/DND~'N~A~W3AO(~ ~~Y ~ ~ q rM-11~ 00 fa~ ~
^ ~ ~ ~ ~ F~ .L: .Ci � w ~-I eC O .
v ~ ~ ' v ~ ~ V ~ ~w ~ M
- v v .
~ R) r-I y 1�1 r-1 w
~ ~ +~NCa G
� ri 01~ H RY~
= crf ~q ~m H w a? � -
I ~ ~ ~ ~I ~ ~ci
~ uc,~~ uN o
.
a~'i ' -
. dG -
11
~ FOR ~FFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
Thus, a frequency spectrum of 12-248 lcilohertz on which transm.ission is ~
realized from the office A was obtained in the output of the group converter. -
' For suppression of the undesirable (in the given case upper) sideband and
the remainder of the carrier, the D-252 filter is included after the
converter. It passes the currents with a frequency above 252 kilohercz.
The group rppeater GY~1 with gain of 40.75 decibels (5.05 nepers) raisea
the signal level to -5.65 decibels (-0.65 nepers). _
On the SIG-30A base the currents in the frequency ban3 of 12-248 ki~ohertz -
then go through the D-280 routing f ilter and the line transformer to the -
line. The routing filter is used to separate the transmission and reception
frequency band of the office, and the line transformer, to match the
75-ohm output of the filter to the 160-ohm input of the cal~le circuit and
transition from the asymmetric filter circuit to the symmetric circuit of
the two-wire line circuit.
The line transformer winding has a midpoint lead fe,r organizing a phantom
circuit linked between operators and for transmission of remote feed to
_ the intermediate repeaters. The group signal in the lower frequency group
of 12-248 kilohertz having a transmission level of -7.4 decibels (-0.85
nepers) is transmitted through the line transformer from the off ice A to
- office B. In this frequency group the carrier of each channel can be _
defined as [560-(304+8n)], and the currents of the channel itself have ,
frequencies below tY~e carrier.
Examples. The useful sideband of the first channel occupying the frequency
band of 312-316 kilohertz at the input to the group channel will be
transmitted over the line at frequencies of 560-(312-316), that is, from -
244 to 248 kilohertz, and a frequency vf 248 kilohertz will correspond to
- the 312 kilohertz carrier.
- The 30th channel occupying the spectrum of 544-548 kilohertz is shifted to
the 12-16 kilohertz range, and the 544 kilohertz carrier will correspond
- to 16 kilohertz. ' _
In the SIG-lA bays, the P-8 rejector filter having an attenuation peak on !
_ a frequency of 8 kilohertz and operating in a pair with the II-8 filter
- (only the point of their connection is shown on the figure) is included
at the outgut of the group repeater. These filters are needed for organizing
- a synchronizing channel, and they are considered in the section on the '
generating equipment of the terminal offices.
The purpose of the group receiving channel o� office B consists in convert-
ing the signal in the 12-248 kilohertz spectrum arriving from the opposite
- off ice to the signa.l with 312-548 kilohertz spectrum, repeating of it,
distribution with respect to the receivers of the 30 channels ~nd compensa-
tion for the frequency-amplitud~ distortions.
~ ~
12 '
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
A line transformer� of the satne purpose as at office A~ia included a.*. the
_ input of the channel. The current level at the input of the *_~ansformer
is -42.6 decibels (-4.9 nepera). P'rom the tranafornter output the group
_ signal goes to the routing filter D-280 and, passing through the fork of
the RP-8 filtero (~,f it is the SIG-1M) or directly (if it is the SIG-30M),
_ it goes to the BY~l auxiliary repeater. The links of attenuation equalizera ~
_ and attenuator are in the same modul.e with Che repeater. The operating
_ principle of the equalizer BK (equalizing ~r correcting circuit) was
= investigated in Chaper 4. Here we shall only point out that out of the set
of faur linka, one link BK is uaed to compensate for the distortions intro-
duced by the two series-connected D-230 routing filtera, one of whj.ch is
_ at the outpt~t of the tranamitting channel of the off ice A, and the other at
, the input of the receiving channel of office B; the other two compensate for
_ distortions introduced by the cable network section, and the fourth element
- is an attenuator and is used for rough (stepped)' ad~uetment of the"level
_ of the receiving signal. The smoQth regulation of.the level is realized by -
the variation in depth of the negative feedback of the repeaters (auxiliary
and group) by means of the variable resistor~, the ahafts of which are led
out to the front panel of the module. From the output of the BY~1 the ~
~ multichannel signal in the 12-248 kilohertz spectrum with a level of
_ -40.9 dec~.bels (-4.7 nepers) goes to the group frequency converter, to which -
the gro~lp carrier frequency of 56~J kilohertz is fed simultaneously from the -
generating equipment. As a result of conversion, two sidebands are obtained: -
the upper sideband 560+(12 to 248), that is, 572 to $08 kilohertz, and the
lower sideband 560-(I2 to 248), that is, 312 to 548 kilohertz. The D-548
filter which follcws the grid converter suppresses all of the unnecessary
conversion products, pasaing only the useful sideband from 312 to 548 kilo- -
hertz. The currents of these fre uencies then 2
repeater where tizey are amplifiedqto a level ofg~12~2tdecibelsg(~1P4 nepera)
- required for operation of the receiver, and then they are distributed with
- respect to the receivers of the 30 channe'ls. In order to increase the pro-
tection between channels, the output of the group..r~ceiving repeater is -
_ made in accordance with a differential circuit (the transformer with a mid-
_ point) providing for the connection of two grouns of 15 receivers each not
_ connected to each other: the even and odd channels.
i'he band filter at the input of each receiver separatea the frequency band
of its channel from ttte group signal, which then is demodulated, being -
_ cor~verted to a low-frequency signal from 0.3 to 3.4 kilohertz, it is ampli-
- fied to a level of +4.35 decibels (+0.5 nepers), and from the output of the
receiver it is routed through the RSILU relay asaembly to the automatic
office equipment.
The transmission channel of the of�ice $ di~fers from the transmisaion
channel of of�ice A in that the office B transtnita a frequency band of
312 to 548 kilohextz formed directly in the transceiver modela of the
30 channela i.n the direction of o�fice A, and therefore it doea not require
group frequency conversion. The absence of a group converter excludes the
13 -
,
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~
FOR OFFICIAL USE UNLY
necessity for the D-252 filter. The remaining elements of the group
channels of the two off ices are identical.
The group signal with a level of -50.46 decibels (-5.8 nepers) goes to the
input of the auxiliary repeater. The repeater increases the signal level
to -40 decibels (-4.6 nepers). The D-552 filter,~suppresses all of the
frequency components abovc~ 552 kilohertz. The group repeater amplifies
the signal, bringing it to a level of -2.2 decibels (-0.25 nepers).
On passing through the routing filter K-280 and the line transformer, the
group signal, occupying the frequency spectrum from 312 to 548 kilohertz
and having a transmission level of -3.9 decibels (-0.45 nepers) is trans-
mitted over the line circuit to the office A.
The group signal occupying a spectrum of 312-548 kilohertz which can be
distributed directly, without conversion, to the receivers of the 30 channels
- goes to the receiving channel of office A; the signal level at the input of ,
the line transformer is equal to -54 decibels (-6.2 nepers). Only pre-
amplification and further amplification of the signal by.means of the
auxiliary repeater BYc2 and the group repea.ter GYc2 and also the compensation _
- for the frequency-amplitude distortions are carried out in this channel.
The signal level at the input of the line transformer is -54 decibels
(-6.2 nepers). Then passing through the K-280 routing filter, the group
signal goes to the module containing the repeaters and equalizers. The
links of equalizer.s are made up analogously to how this is done in the ,
- receiving channel of station B, but the parameters are different, for they
are designed for another freq~ency band. The group repeater brings the _
receiving signal level to -12.2 decibels (-1.4 nepers), and distr ibutes it
with respect to two groups of receivers of the even and odd channels.
Further processes are identical in both offices. -
6.5. Signal Channel
In contrast to the nonmultiplex circuits, where the interaction signal~
are transmitted directly by battery power (direct current), the methods of
signal transmission by audio-frequency currents are used in the multiplexing
equipment. In the KF.R M equipment the segregated individual channel
approximately 100 hertz wide located above the eff ectively transmitted ,
frequency band of the speaking channel is available for this purpose. The
average frequency of this channel the signal frequency is 3800 hertz.
- For organization of the signal channel the transceiver module has circuits ;
designed �or signal ~requency voltag~ input to i.he transmitting section _
and output o~ it from the receiving aection of the channel. In each
channel there is an electronic xe~ay called a static relay which controls
- the operation of these circuits. The static relay is an electronic relay
made from a low~frequency transistor i^ accordance with ths single-stage _
amplification circuit with common emitter (Fig 6.6), and it is included ~
between the 3800 hertz voltage source and the channel transmitter. Depend- -
ing on the condiction of its circuitry, the static relay transmits or
14
FOR OFF~CIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
does not transmit signal frequency voltage to the channel. This occurs as
follows: at the connection times when interaction signals are not trans-
mitted over the channel, the transistor emitter circuit ia broken by the
contacts of the relays in Che RSLU assembly (in the circuit theae contacts ,
are provisionally replaced by a group of control contacts p). In this
case the stage is closed, and the signal frequency doea not pass through it.
In other ~onnection phases when the channel is busy, a number is dialed,
ring-off is being realized and the RSLU assembly circuits are ad~usted to
the corresponding states, the contacts of the relays of these assemblies
close the positive feed circuit o~ the battery to the transistor emitter.
Accordingly, the transistor is opened, and the signal frequency volCage
amplified by it goes to the transceiver module. In the channel tranamitter _
the signal frequency passes through the same modulation circuit ~s the _
talk signal, as a result of which the upper sideband frequency FH+3.8 kilo- _
hertz is transmitted over the group channel to the opposite office. -
- fA
R
R1 y K nepedam
- vuKy
uCm~y- Ri l ~~"anQ
nr~rra , (2) -
nanpnn~enua ~
JB00 /'u R1 P
(1)
1
Figu=e 6.6. Static relay of the channel
Key : -
~ 1. From the 3800 hertz voltage source
2. To the channel transmitter _
- On the receiving end of the channel af ter demodulation the 3.8 kilohertz
voltage goes to the control signal receiver PSU, where it is rectified,
DC amplif ied and provides for operation of the servomechanism the relay
in the RSLU assembly. This relay, on responding, ad3usts the asaembly
- circuitry so that the call, rin g-off or other state is created. Thus,
on the outgoing side of the channel, the DC pulse~ in the 3800 hertz signal
frequency sending are converted by the static relay, and on the incoming
side of the channel, on the contrary, the signal frequency is converted to =
DC pulses by means of the PSU [control signal receiver].
- The use of the stati.c relay insures reliable operation of the aignal
channel for it creates a large signal frequency level gradient in the
- open and closed state. With the static relay open, Che current at the
output of the PSU (the operating current of the PSU) IP=45+5 milliamps, -
and with the static relay closed the quiescenC current of the PSU I.~ ia -
no more than 0.5 milliamps.
15
- FOR OFFICIAL USE.ONLY ~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~OR OFFICIAL USE UNLY - -
There are 120 static relays in the SIG-1M bay on four plates of 30 each. _
The power is fed to the plates from a 24 or 60 volt station battecy.
6.6. Channel Transceiver -
General Information
The transceiver is the basic module of the individual channel equipment, -
and it is used for conversion of the talking and signal currents to high-
frequency currents on the transmitting end of the channel and inverse _
conversion of the high-frequency spectrum to the currents of the initial
voice frequencies, and the signal frequency sending to DC pulses on the _
receiving end of the channel.
Structurally, thc: transmitter and the receiver are made on separate plates
using printed circuitry.
The structural diagram of the transceiver is depicted in Fig 6.7.
The basic assemblies of the transmitter (plate No 1) forming the talk ~
channel are as follows: the UD11 attenuator, the Tpl input transformer,
the r-3,4 filter, the ~K1, ~K2, ~K3 phase-shifting circuits, two modulators _
M1 and M2, the output transformer Tp2 and attenuator UD12. For'the signal
- channel there is an F-3,8 filter on the transmitter plate. -
The raceiver plate (plate No 2) contains the following: the band filter ~
II~, the demodulator DM, the band-elimination filter Z-8, the low-frequency
amplifier UNCh loaded with respect to the talk channel on the D-3,4 filter,
and with respect to the signal channel on the control signal receiver PSU.
The latter consists of the signal frequency band filter Pf sign., the
- amplifier-detector Us D and the trigger circuit. In addition, the receiver _
. plate contains the voltage stabilizer Ct, from which the entire transceiver
module except tihe PSU is fed.
The purpose of the individual assemblies and the operating principle of the -
module will be considered with respect to its schematic diagram presented
in Fig 6.8. .
Transmitter Plate
From the relay-switching cixcuit o~ the channel (the RSLU assembly) the
~ speaking currents with a level o~ -13.0 decibels (-1.5 nepers) go to the
transmitter input (terminals Kg-K10)e The j,nput impedance of the transmitter
equal to 600 ohms is ~reated by means o~ the attenuator R1, R2, R3, R4; -
the attenuation of the a~tenuator is 3.48 decibels (0.4 nepers).
The symmetrizing transformer Tpl realizes the transition from the symmetric
circuit of the attenuator to the asymmetric circuit of the filter and
16
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
I
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
-
~-~3f~ . ~ I
9Dq~ T~j 4�9,4 ~ ~AXt Ml C5> j
~ rAz . ~r?nr I
I
I r.cuz~:r�r, ,y,9 ~Xj Mt
- ~ ' � fecc~l ~7 ~ -
I � . ~~r3 ,
L2~ama,vn 48) -
- ~ 'J~B ~ g~_ _ _ - _ _ _ - - _ , `
I Gm. 10 ~
- ~ `4,3~5/G00 I -
I . ~:3,4 1 ~ _
I . yH4 .~-e qM no I
~ ~~5~ r - - - ~
~ �i,t. uan, Kcy s nm , 4) -
_ I _ ~ ~ ~Q C!(8N. . ( _
- ( ~ ~cy 18. ~
_ ~ An
oi~a N~1 � L _~1-3)- - - - - - - - - - - -
- -
Figure 6.7. Structural diagram of the transceiver
xey:
i. . un~l ii. ~-3,4 ~
~ 2. D-3,4 ~ . 12. UNCfi
3. Decoupling 13. DM
4. FK 14. PF band f�ilter
= 5. UD12 . 15.~ Output signal channel
6. Input signal channel 16. -60 volts
fcarrier 17. Us-D
8. Plate No 1 18. Pf sign. [signal frequency band -
9. -15 volts filter]
10. St. 19. PSU
- 20. Plate No 2
- eliminates direct coupling of the transmitter circuit to its output. A
capacitor Ci with a capacitance of 0.1 microfarads, the second plate of
which is connected to the:.ground is connected to the midpoint of the primary
winding of the transformer. The capacitor is used to suppress pulae inter-
ference penetrating the channel. -
The D-3,4 filter made up of the inductance coils L1, L3, L4, L5 and the
capacitors C3, C4, CS,, C6, C~, Cg and Cg suppresses the componenta of the
- speaking signal with frequencies above 3.4 kilohertz. The epeaking epectrum
of the subacribers contains higher �requencies which on being transmitted
through the ape~king channel can cauae incorrect operation o~ the signal
_ ch~nnels of its own and the ad~acent spectrum and also create interference
in the ad~acent apeaking channels. Thus, a frequency of 3.8 kilohertz,
pasaing through the D-3,4 filter o� the tranamitting end of the channel
during talking, will be picked up as a signal frequency on the receiving
- end by the s.igr.al channel receiver. As a result, the relays in the RSLU
- 17
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
r~ux ur~r~l~l~ u~r: ~nLx -
~~ama N�i 1 ' =
t' ~ L+ 4' _
Il�!,4 L~ Q ~ k
H~ Rt Tp J 1 ~ e 9
C,a ~j 3 Q ~
R~ R~ H' i i ~3 C~ cs Cb ~e ~9 n~ Rp
� S ~i ?
K~o R~ 6 R~~ ~
.
Ng RS R(
~ ~ ~ Ri2
CZ ~2
N6 - g ~ 4 ~ . ~ . -
i_
I~ -
nnm~va N'z ~ ) ~
- � R~4' -
Ras
- av... '
- c,~ T
S r ~ S
H~9 ~tr rP3) ' d r
~ J 2 L~~ C Ry' ~ I 6 R+Z ~ ~ 74: ~''26
20
K~ ~i9 -L� ; ~ f Ry3$ Il7 41~ 6 .
' ~,tl i~. ~85 ~ Tp e CZ~ �7
ti
z, r . .
Kn TS R79 R R40 ~23 9 .
n R
ocn Ra~ T6 F ~ l~
I �
- R38 ~ 3 ~=Y ~ 9
RJS C~ 39 ~p I 0 ~sy ~ � �
)
Figu~ce 6.8. Schematic diagram of
. i
~i
- i8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
. ~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
, i
.
- ,
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY ~
ll~~ma h'~~ ~1) ~ ' ' -
C~o ~~2
~ ~6 � ~ ~ -
~ q
� R i---II Rti
. ' Ra ~ q~~� ~ rPZ N~
`w ~ RK N a 1 1 nGePeBava
k C~~ I= Ri1 C7 6 ' I j R
1 4 ~ J~
- � ' ! ? -
. C~~ ' nn~ 6 K~
- � i LJ ! ~ Rn R Rt~ Lit k
- R14 ' R. a+^r~
_..o/~ ~!D Rlb u R~~ KI
.
~ C?s . ~ Rao .
/I~ama ti?2 (2)
' Nn . .
� � Nn ~
~ ~pf ~
i~o ~
_ : Rb~ ~e ~ ' ~H
` R~ y, I a s, na.rnc~fav pueemp Rsd ~ ~ 4)
. u ~ (3). /1pr~MCVaNUS ~99c~&~vea o,ra~i
, f ~ adwHnveNUx en Menma mHava~
M~~ tm, ymo an na~6r~patmcA npu
~ ~ pu~~M~ �
1p R ~ ~
27 Kn I
: ~
~ , , . . . kII0 (
-~O
~ ~ a transceiver . ~ -
_ Key: .
1. Plate No 1 ~
2. Plate No 2 ,
~ 3. Band filter
4. Note. The asterisk next to the designation of an element indicates
that it is selected during ad~ustment
Transmission
~ 19 -
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY J`
assemblies will respond, and the subscriber will be sent a busy signal
during the conversation. The currents with a frequency of 4.2 kilohertz,
reaching the ad3acent channel, after demodulation in it, will have a fre-
quency of 3.8 kilohertz (8.0-4.2=3.8). This will be the cause for improper
operation of the adjacent signal channel. In addition, the currents with
frequencies above 4.2 kilohertz (frequencies to 12 kilohertz can be
contained in the subscriber voices), getting into the ad~acent speaking
channels, after demodulation in them, will be converted to eff ectively
transmitted fr equency bands of these�-channels and cause interf erence in
them.
In order to avo id the indicated interf erence in the adjacent signal and
speaking channels, the D-3,4 filter has attenuation peaks on frequencies
of 3.8 and 4.2 kilohertz, and at frequencies above 4.6 kilohertz its ,
- attenuation must also remain quite high. The frequency characteristic of
the f ilter attenuation is presented in F3.g 6.9. The attenuator R~, R8 and
the decoupling resistors R9-It12 are used to match the filter to the phase-
difference circuit for suppressing one sideband.
The signal frequency current, passing through the static relay, reaches
the input of the signal channel (the terminals K9-K6), where the ~-3,8
band filter is included made up of the resonance circuit L2C2 and the
resistor R5. On a frequency of 3.8 kilohertz the circuit has current
resonance and introduces minimum attenuation. From the frequency characteris-
tic of the filter presented in Fig 6.10 it is obvious that on detuning the
circuit, its attenuation increases sharply. The presence of the f ilter at
the input of the signal channel decreases the interf ~rence in the ad3acent
channels on transmission of the number dialing pulses. The signal frequency
pulses are not sinusoidal voltage of one frequency 3.8 k~lohertz, but they
contain a number of other frequency components, the voltages of which taken
together could cause significant interference in the adjacent channel if ~
Chey were not suppressed by the filter. In addition, the filter ~-3,8
plays the role of a symmetrizing transformer providing for the transition
from the asymmetric circuit of the static relay to the symmetric phase-
difference circuit. ~
ydb ' .
~ ~
t2~
, ,
_ , ~
, �
- ~ ~ , .
~ 1,Q ~,7 1) I, xru
Figure 6.9. Frequency attenuation charactexistic o~ the D-3,4 f ilter
Key:
1. f , kilohertz
2. a, dec ibels
20 '
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY ~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
' _
~ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
r;
~d6~
' ~2)
F 3 a s s~(1) f,Kru
~ Figure 6.10. Frequency attenuation characteristic of the ~-3,8
f ilter
~ Key: -
Y 1. f, kilohertz
- 2. a y decibels
The signal frequency voltage ie fed through the resiator R6 to the phase-
difference circuit. By the selection of this resistor the signal frequency
: level is set 5.21+1.74 decibels below the measuring level in the channel.
After the D-3,4 and ~-3,8 filters the speaking and signal channels are -
~oined together, and from there on they run through the same elements of
the phase-difference circuit which is divided into two branches I and II -
by the decoupling made up of the resistora R9, Rlp, R11 and R12. "
The phase-difference circuit is used to convert the low-frequency signals
to high-frequency oscillations containing only one modulation aideband,
- in the given case, the upper one. Let us remember that in the KRR equipment
in order to decrease the cost of the terminal equipment, the channel
transceivers do not contain comglex, expensive filicers which suppress the
currents of the sideband not used in the given channel (and also other
_ side conversion products),.and the suppression of these currenta is realized _
by the phase difference modulation circuit, the pr3nciple of which was =
investigated in Chapter 4. In contrast to the previoualy presented layout
_ with ene phase-shiftin~ circuit ~Kl, here in each branch of the circuit I
~ and II there is a~Kl and ~K2 circuit inasmuch as in practice it is imposc~i- _
ble to create a circuit which will inaure a single phase ahift for a voltage _
of any frequency from 300 to 3800 hertz; the higher the current frequency,
the greater the phase shif t it acquires, on passing through the circuit,
as is obvious from Fig 6.11. The required phase ratio between the currents
reaching Che modulators ef branches I and II can be obtained only as the
difference in the phase shifta created in each of the branches by the _
corresponding circuit ~K1 and @K2. Here, as is obvioua from the figure,
the relative phase shift of 90� remains constant for the currents in the
entire s~ectrum �rom 300 to 3800 hertz.
The phase shifting circuits ~kKl and ~KZ are sections made up of aeries and -
parallel-connected inductance coila and capacitors: L6, C10' ~11' L7'
- L8~ ~12~ ~13' L9~ ~14~ ~15' .
~ 21
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
I
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
r~OR UFr~IC:lat, US~: UNLY -
- ~
'360� ~ .
_
180� t
/ ~K2
i . I ' ~
0 300 600 10D0 2000 ~3000 4000 5000 f ru ~1 ~ -
Figure 6.11. Relative phase shift between the branches of the
phase-difference circuit
Key : ~ -
1. f , hertz ,
i-
The ~K3 circuit is designed for creating a phase shift by 90� only for ~
the current of one carrier frequency, and it is the section made up o.f the ~
inductance coils Llp, L11 and the capacitor C16. The circuit is included '
so that the carrier voltage reaches the modulator M2 directly from the
GIN [individual carrier g~nerator?], that is, without a phase shift, and ~ ~
it reaches the modulator M1 through the circuit.. For introduction af identical ;
attenuation by both branches of the circuit, there are resistors R13 and
R14, the ratings of which are aelected.
The channel modulators are executed from the P416 high-frequency transi.stors
in a balancing circuit which eliminates the carrier frequency current from
- the converted signal. In contrast to the balancing converter circuitry
presented in Chap~er 4, the diff erential 3nput transformers are�replaced
by the resistors R15, R16 a~ R17~ R18 by me~ns of wh3ch grounded midpoints
= are f ormed. These same resistors connected in parallel to the high-resistance
= input circuitsof the transistorized modulators are the load for the phase-
_ shifting circuits. .
The low-frequency signal is f ed to the transistor bases, and the carrier
- voltage to the emitters through the resistors R30 s~erving as the decoupling
between the carrier circuits of the diff erent channels fed from one GIN.
~
- For temperature stabilization of the operatin~ conditions of the modulators, :
~ the basic resistors R~~, R21, R~4, R~~ and the auxiliary resistors R19~
R22, R23 , R26 are inc uded in t e em tter circuits o~ the transistors. ~
By varying the ratings of the latter it is possible to regul.aCe the amplifi-
cation of the modulators by equalizing the attenuat3.on a~ both branches ~
of the phase-dif~erence circuit. ;
The f eed voltage of -9 volts is fed to the modulators through the midpoint
of the output transfoxmer TP2. The second terminal of the power supply is
- grounded. The transformer TP2 is simultaneously the load through which
the converter currents of both modulators flow. Let us remember that
22 ' i
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
i
I
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
the currents of the upper sidebands coincide with respect to phas~ and
are added, and the currents o� the lower sidebands are opposite in phase
and are subtracted. -
The degree of suppression of the lower sidEband depends on the accurecy
of achievement ef the relative phase ahift by 90� of the initial converaion ~
- products and also it dependa on the equality of the attenuations in the
branchas of the phase difference circuit. Inasmuch as in the KRR equipment
the goal was r.ot staked of locating the ad~acent channel in the spectrum
of the suppressed sideband, in order to decrease the cost and eimplify the
: indiv~dual equipmeiit of the channels we are limited to suppreasion of the
lower sideband by only 25.2 decibels (2.9 nepers), that is, attenuation of
_ it by approximatel.y 20 times by comparison with the useful sideband. This
value is sufficient for the fluctuations of the useful signal level and,
= in the final analysis, the reaidual attenuation of the channel not to
exceed +0.43 decibels (�0.05 nepers). _
The L-type attenuator R28, R29 serving as the decoupling between the
individual channels combined with respect to secondary winding of the
_ output transformer and connected in parallel to the input of the group
equipment of the system is included at the output of the circuit. For
normal operation of the channels, the mutual coupling between them is small
_ as a result of high output r?_-sistance of the collector circuits o� the -
- transistors, but if as a result of failure in any channel a short circuit -
appears in one modulator, then operation over all 30 channels becomes
impossible. The R23, R29 attenuator attenuates the coupling between the -
channels and simultaneousiy serves for establishment of the required magni-
tude of the output impedance of the plate.
- The useful signal current level at the output of the transmitter with
30 parallel-included transmitters is equal to -50.46 decibels (-5.8 nepers) -
on a load resistance of 75 ohms. ~
The application of the pha.se-diff erence modulation circuit made it possible
- to standardize the transceiver module. The only replaceable assembly of `
- the transmitter is the ~Kg phase-shifting circui: in the carrier circuit.
All the remaining plate assemblies are identical for all 30 channels.
- Channel Receiver
The high-frequency group signal occupying the frequency spectrum of 312-548
kilohertz and having a level of -12.2 declbels (-1.4 nepers) on a load of
75 ohms goes to the channel receiver. The II~ (PF) band f ilter designed for
separation of.the currents o~ its own channel from the group signal is _
included at the input of the receiver (terminals K11~ K13~� The frequency -
damping characteristic of the filter does not have great steepness; its
pass band is approximately 10 kilohertz. The basic purpose of the filter _
consists in limiting the power of the signals reaching the demodulator
and capable of caus3ng overloading of it and dietortions in the channels.
23
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR UFF'ICtAL USE UNLY
_ Having suc}~ a wide pass band, the filter does not introduce sufficient
= attenuatic~n for the currents of the near frequencies of the ad~acent
ch,lnncls ,(the channel in the KRR equipment occupies a band 8 kilohertz ~
~ wlde). Tl.ierefore, in order to avoid crosstalk the channel receivers are _
separate~i into two groups even and odd. Inside each group tha channel
filters are connected in parallel, and the two groups are decoupled by
means oi a diff erential system included at the output of the group receiving _
amplifier (see Fig 6.28).
_ The band filter is the only assembly of the receiver which is diff erent
for each of the 30 channels, and it is executed structurally in the form
of a separate removable plate element.
- Fron? the filter output the high-frequency signal goes to the demodulator, -
at the input of which the TP5 matching transformer is included. The de- -
modulator is executed from two high-frequency transistors T10 and T11 with
_ respect to the balancing circuit. The high-frequency signal which is
subject to converszon is fed to the transistor bases; the carrier is f ed
- to the emitter circuits, and the demodulated low-frequency signal is picked
_ up from the collector circuits.
u The resistors R48, R49 in the emitter circuits have the same purpose as -
in the modulator circuit. The circuit C28, L18, R50 with voltage resonance
on a frequency of 3.4 kilohertz is designed to decrease the negative f eed- _
back on the upper frequency of the speaking spectrum on which the demodulator
- creates reduced gain (in the transceiver modules of the KRR-M equipment the
_ transistorized converters o~erate in a mode insuring not only signal con-
version, but also signal amplification). The capacitors C26 and C27 in
the output circuits of the transistor shunt the remains of the carrier and
the upper sideband, and the useful demodulation products the lower side-
band currents reach the demodulator load circuit through the transformer -
- Tp4. Power is fed through the midpoint of this transformer to the collector
cl.rcuits of the transistors. The circuit L1~, C25 with voltage resonance
on a frequency of 8 kilohertz is connected in parallel to the secondary
- winding of the transformer. This voltage is formed in thp demodulator as '
_ the difference product between the remains of the carrier frequencies of '
the two adjacent channels and, on passing through the low-frequency amplifier
UNCh, can cause crosstalk of the adjacent chanriel. The circuit prevents i
the currents of this frequency from reaching the input of the low-frequency
amplifier. The circuit Ll~, C25 ~ointly with the capacitors C26, C27 form
the ~and-elimination filter Z-8. '
i-
; The low-�frequency amplifier contains one amplification stage m3de from the ~
transistors Tg, T9 with respect to the two-cycle circuit. This type of
circuit decreases the nonlinear distort3ons of the amplifier, as a result
of which crossovers of. the currents in the channels can appear along with �
false operation o� the signal channel (sending of the busy signal during
a conversation). '
' i~
- 24
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
I -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
I
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
The resiatora R46 and R47 create the required bias on the bases of the
transistors, and the transistora R42 and R43 in the emitCer circuits are
_ used for stabilizing the amplification conditions. The collector circuits
are fed through the midpoint of the primary winding of the output transformer =
Tp3. The output level of the aignal is regulated roughly (step regulation)
- by the alibning resietora R45 and R44 and the ~ontinuously variabl;
resistance R56 included in parallel to the input of the amplifier and
shunting it. The smaller this reaistance, the amaller the gain of the -
- amplifier. Here the resistor R44 does not permit complete shunting of the
input of the amplifier or makin g its amplification extremely small, and
the resistor R45 does not permit making it extremely large. The regulating
resistance R56 equipped with an arm and dial is led out to the front panel -
of the unit and permits ad~ustment of the gain within the limits +4.35
_ decibels (+0.5 nepers). Two loada are connected to the output of~the low-
frequency amplifier: the D-3,4 filter with respect to the apeaking channel
and the PF sign filter with respect to the aignal channel.
The D-3,4 filter containa inductance coils of L12, L13~ L14 and the capaci-
tors C17, C19, C2p, C21 and, in contrast to the analogous filter installed ~
on the plate of the transmitter, it is made by the symmetric scheme, for
it is the last link of the receiver directly connected to the symmetric
circuit of the RSLU assembly. The filter D-3,4 delays the currents with
frequencies above 3.4 kilohertz, that is, the signal frequency current of -
its own channel and the currents of the ad~acent channels having frequencies
above 4.2 kilohertz at the demodulator output and this eliminates the inter-
ference and the noise in the channel. The signal level of the filter output
_ is +4.35 decibels (+0.5 nepers) on a load of 600 ohms.
The control signal receiver is designed for receiving the signal frequency
sending from the transmitting end of the channel and conversion of them to
_ DC pulses required for operation of the relaya (K or RZ) installed in the
RSLU assemblies. The contacts of these relays create interaction signal
transmission circuit to the automatic office devicea. In order to insure
reliable and stable operation of these relays, the ~urrent in their coils -
_ must either be completely absent (for example, on transmission of a conver-
_ sation over the channel) orhave maximum value (for transmission of the
interaction signa.ls). Therefore the PSU must operate as a switch having
- only two states: closed-open; the transition from one state to another =
- must take place not gradually, but discontinuously. The trigger circuit
- is most appropriate for the creatioz~ of such a regime.
The PSU contains the ~F sign band filter made up o~ the coils L15 , L16'
the capacitora C22, C23, C24 and insuring ita frequency aelectivity,
the detector asnplifier based on the traneistor T~ and the trigger circuit
executed ~rom the transistors T6, T5. ('rhe~operating principle of the
_ trigger circuit is investigated in Chapter 4.) A veraion of the asymmetric
circuit a Schmidt trigger is uaed in the PSU of the transceiver
module. �
25
~ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
F~JR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
The trigger can be found in only one of two states: where the transistor
T6 is completely open, and the transistor TS is closed or when T6 is -
closed and TS is completely open. Any other state is extremely unstable
for j..t as a result of which it goes discontinuoutly from one state to ,
anotl~c~r. Tlli~ takes place as a result of poaitive feedback between th~~
transistors ttirough the resistor R35. The feedback voltage developed o~i
this resistor has always directed so that it decreases the negative poten- _
tial of the base of the closing transistor and increa.ses it on the base -
_ of the opening transistor.
~
'w! In the initial state when the signal at the PSU input is absent or its
~ voltage is less than the threshold voltage (the voltage drop on the -
resistor R39), the transistor T~ is blockpd. The negative potential of _
the power supply is fed through the resistors R36 and R37 to the base of -
the transistor T6. For such a low potential on the base the transistor T6
_ is completely open and the current passing through it creates a voltage
drop on R35 which closes the transistor T5 through D3, and the relay in
- the RSLU simp~y does not operate.
If the input voltage exceeds the threshold voltage, then in the negative
halfperiod of this voltage the transistor T~ opens, and the current in the -
- circuit increases:
Plus, R39, T~, R37, minus and the base potential of T6 increases (it becomes
less negative) . E~
~ l
The transistor T6 begins to close, and the resistance of its collector-
emittor section in~reases. As a result, the negative potential of the
base of the transistor T5 increases, and the collector current begins to
flow through it. Since the collector current of T5 is much greater than
the collector current of T6, the voltage drop on the resistor Rg5 increases
- as a result of~which T6 closas even more and T5 opens. This promotes a ~
still greater increase in the collector current of the transistor T5 and -
a voltage drop on RgS, and, consequently, more complete blocking of T6.
_ The process takes pLace in avalanche manner, as a',result of which T6 closes
in practice discontinuously, and T5 opens completely. The relay included
at the output of PSU responds.
If the signal amplitude at the input of the receiver becom~es less than the
threshold value, then T~ closes, and the base potential T6 becomes more
negative. T6 begins to open from this, shunb.ing the base circuit T5, the .
collector current of which begins to decrease. The decrease in the current
causes a reduction in the voltage on the resistor R3S, which promotes more
complete blocking of T6. The base circuit of T5 is shunted more strongly,
and the collector current of this transistor and the voltage drop on the
_ resistor R35 decrease still more. The process, 3ust as in the preceding
case, builds up avalanche-like, as a result of which T6 in practice opens _
_ discontinuously, and T5 closes completely. The relay at the PSU output
- ais triggered, and the circuit goes to the initial state.
26
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
Thus, PSU has.two stable states: open where the signal voltage at the input
of tl?e receiver exceeds the threshold voltage, and closed, where the aignal
ae ~lie input of tlie receiver is absent or iCs voltage ie lesa tlian the
, threshold voltage. Correspondingly, the current in the relay winding with
open receiver is equal to the operating current (and the relay operates), -
_ and with a closed receiver it ts equal to the quiescent current (and the _
relay does not operate). This cr: icteristic of the trigger PSU permits
us to obtain its highest noisepr ~�~.ess. Actually, the interf erence pene-
trating to the input of the receiver cannot cause false response of it
(if the voltage of this interference is leas than the threshold voltage).
The operating current of the PSU is 45+5 milliampa, the quieacer~t current
does not exceed 0.5 milliampa. The PSU is fed from a separate voltage
source of -60 volts in order not to create interference in the talk channels
from the current pulses of the signal channel through the common power
supply. The output transistor T5 of the Crigger circuit fs fsd from the
- automatic office battery through the relay circuit of the RSLU assembly.
For stabilization of the feed voltage of the transistors on the receiver -
- plate there is a D814B type silicon stabilitron~ by means of which a constant
voltage is maintained. The atabilization principle is illustrated in -
Fig 6.12. The circuit diagram of the stabilizer is presented in Fig 6.12a,
and its volt-ampere characterist~c is presente~l in Fig 6.12b.
R 1 -
- ~ ~ -
R U ' ,
E Q n jQ(i) ~ IUnOp (2) ~
1
t 0 U
� ~
Figure 6.12. Voltage stabilization in the transceiver module -
_ Key: -
1. Uload
2' Uthreshold
Under ths effect of positive and sma.ll negative voltages the characteristic -
- of this diode does not di~fer in any way from the analogous characteristics
of ordinary silicon diodes. However, as soon as the negative voltage
re.aches the threshold value Uth eshold~ the current through the diode
increases sharply as a result o~ a aharp decrease in its internal impeslance
- which will become equal to 10-20 ohms.
As is obvious from the figur.e, the load resistance RH ia included parallel
to the diode, and the ballast resistance R is connected in series to the
- voltage source E. For sma11 values of E below the threshold, the current =
- in practice does not flow through the diode, and all the voltage E is
distributed between RH and R. When the voltage on the stabilitron reaches -
the threshold value, with a further increase in it, the current through
27 -
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
the stabYlitron will increase sharply. 'Phis additional current causes an
increase in the voltage drop on the ballast resistance R so that the
voltage on the diode almost does not change, leaving it equal to the
threshold voltage (in the given case 9 volts).
- 6.7. Generating Equipment
General Information
- The.generating equipment of the terminal office generates all the voltages
= required for operation of four KRR-M equipment systems: 30 individual
carrier frequencies of the channels beginning with 312 to 544 kilohertz,
- every 8 kilohertz; the group carrier 560 kilohertz; the signal frequency -
3.8 kilohertz and the synchronizing frequency 8 k3.lohertz. The equipment
is constructed by the harmonic system with a ref erence frequency of
8 kilohertz. ,
The structural diagram of the generating equipment is presented in Fig 6.13.
The reference frequency voltage selected by the master oscillator ZG with ~
quartz stabilization goes through the differential transformer Tp2 to the ;
harmonic generator rr made up of two parts structurally executed in different
modules: the power amplifiers Yc rr and the nonlinear system HC rr. !
The nonlinear system converts the sinusoidal current of ref erence frequency ;
to the current having the form of the curve with sharp pointed pulses of ~
positive and negative polarity. Such a current contains a large numt~er of
odd harmonics of the ref erence frequency.
- ~ N u
du~u~yaseNa: I
- ~1) (15 ) ~ yec~wue -
P~ iu (9)
3! I -
- OcNOBNau Tpr Ip OcNOGuc
~2~ t I ~ ~'y (14) :
! p4 11
- r !uy . yrmye~: ~ )
uNduDud~m~r.Nn~r
J~ NC ~~r ~ Bei.~. y,cvulut -
- Oe Nuu ~ Oe3e00Hau 2
!/!N
i=BK~u (4~ ~3)
� Cuy~rpaHU~up wulaA ~
~ 5~ vncmom~ Cutr,
�neNaa ( 6) /F;~nr. c~'o.Q 12
- ~ ~,L`OCNOGh"0~ vaCmDmo,I,BKPq ylf~ He~yu~oA
J
( 3 ~~,rrpDyeiri y~H 360R~q
(13)
- Figure 6.13� Structural diagram o~ the generating equipment
_ Key:
- 1-- ZG = master oscillator; 2- basic; 3-~ reserve; 4-- f=8 kilo-
hertz; 5-- synchronizing frequency; 6-- signal frequency 3.8 kilohertz;
7-- output; 8-- GIN = individual carrier generator; 9-- odd ,
individual carrier; 10 UGN = group carrier repeater; 11 even
individual carriers; 12 group carrier; 13 560 kilohertz; "
14 monitor; 15 harmonic generator power amplifier; 16 .
harmonic generatornonlinear system ~
28
- ~ FOR OF,F,~C,14~L .U$E...O~`II.~X.... .
'
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
In order to obtain the even harmonics, the rectifying diode bridge i~
used at the output of which a train of one sign is formed containing only
- the even harmonice of the reference frequency. -
Generators of the odd individual carrier frequencies are connected to the
first output, and even to the second. -
The reference frequency harn~onice are separated by the narrow-band filters,
they are amplified and are used to stabilize the individual carrier fre-
quenciea of the channels. These procesaes are realized in the individual
carrier generators GIN. The GIN has two outputs: baeic and monitor. From
the basic output the ca~rier voltage ~oes to the transceiver module for
realizing the modulation and demodulation procesaes, and from the monitor -
_ output, to the monitor module KY, by means of which the operation of the GIN
is monitored. The GIN inputa are connected to the even and odd outputa of
- the harmonic generator in parallel 15 each. The basic and reserve group -
carrier amplifiers (560 kilohertz) YTH are also connected to the even output.
In addition to the enumerated equipment, the generating equipment of the
- terminal off ice includes two (basic and reserve) aignal frequency 3.8 kilo-
hertz generatora and devices�,for transmitting and receiving the synchronizing -
frequency. Synchronization causea forced operation of the harmonic generators
of different offices from the same reference frequency and it is carried
out for exact coincidence of the carriers on the transmitting and receiving -
ends of the channel.
Master Oscillator
The master oscillator ZG (Fig 6.14) is executed from two 6Zh1P tubes.
The generator or exciter of the autooscillations is the primary tube L1. -
_ For stabilizing the frequency of these oscillations between the primary
- and secondary grids of the tube L1 there is a quartz resonator KB with
_ natural resonance frequency of 8 kilohertz. The load of the first etage
- of the generator is the oscillatory circuit LC4 tuned to a frequency of
- 8 kilohertz. The voltage picked up from this circuit is fed to the~controlling
grid of the tube L2. The second stage is a resonance voltage amplifier. -
- The load of this stage is the parallel connected capacitor Cg and the pri-
- mary winding of the output transformer. For tuning the generator frequency
there is a semivariable capacitor Cg. The output voltage is regulated by
the potentiometer R6. The rated ma.gnitude of the voltage at the output of
the module is 2.5 volts.
For reliable stabilization of the ~requency of the generated oacillations
- a quartz resonator is placed in a thertnostat with constant temperature of
- +50�C. The automatic maintenance of this temperature is realized by a
heating coil (the heating element NE), the relaye P1 and PZ and the
thermocantactors TK1, TK2 (Fig 6.15). Until the temperature in the
thermostat reaches 50�C, the transistor T is open, the relay P1 operates
- and by its contact 3-4 closes the feed circuit of the heating coil.
_ 2g
FOR OFFICTAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR UFFICIAL USE UNLY
When the temperature in the thermostat reaches 50�C, the mercury column.
of the thermocontactor TK1 closes the feed ci.rcuit of +24 volts to the
transistor base. The latter is blocked, the relay P1 opens and breaks the
- coil feed circuit. When the temperature drops the heating element is
_ again switched on. When the thermocontactor TK1 fails, the thermocontactor
TK2 is switched on. It is designed to respond from a temperature of +60�C. -
The contacts of this thermocontactor close the operating circuit of the
P2 relay which switches off the heating element and creates an emergency
= signal at the SIG-1M bay.
R
.p
H~ 10 N1.
Aa.~oO
. R~ ~ \ ~
GQ I R~0 1
~3 R~ '
J 4 ~ ~J K1
F-o _
.n
A'B ? R6 1 m
-
R4 .1.
R1 FNj ~ ~S ~N? 1 RQ ~I .
~ 1 Jt.wna -
. -toa (3) ~2)
Figure 6.14. Master oscillator
Key:
1. Output -
2. Ground
3. -24 volts
~24B (1) H32~ p~
T/f 4 ~
~3, � Q,p 50�C _
-246 P T~
1~-~--
3 6
~Utk. 1 !
t P
Cu �y D 6 t 3 _
TK GO'C Q
^'148 1 ' ! Py 2 -
~ 3 4 ~
~
+~r~p (5) p; .
� o-
Figure 6.15. Circuit diagram o~ the thermocontactors and thermostat
Key:
l. ~24 volts 5,. +24 volts
2. NE heating element
3. -24 vol.ts -
4. signal _
30
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL U5E ONLY
The generatin~ equipment includes two master oacillators: basic and
reserve. 'llietr outputs are connscted in parallel to a common ioga. During
- operation of the basic generator the.reserve generator is blocked by a -
nega.tive voltage of -24 volta �ed to the grid of the tube L2 and aimul-
taneously to the aignal tube SL on the face panel of the unit. When this -
- light burns it indicaCea that the module is not operating. On failure of
the basic module, the blocking voltage is removed from the reserve module,
and it automatically switchea on.
The mastQr oscillators are connected to the differential transformer Tpl.
~ The secondary winding of this transformer hae a midpoint at which the
ZG voltage is aplit into two outpute. The load of the first output ia Che -
transformer Tp2 from which the voltage goes to the input of the harmonic
generator of its own office. From the aecond output the voltage with a
frequency of 8 kilohertz can be transmitted to the second office for
synchronization of its generating equipment. The devices through which
this voltage is trans~eitted form the synchronization channel. -
Synchronization Channel
There are two methods of synchronizing the generating equipment of the
terminal stations: 1) local or ~ynchronization with respect to directions
of operation and 2) general or centralized synchronization. Fig 6.16 shows
- the local synchronization system. The essence of it is that the master
oscillator operates only at one of the terminal offices (office A). The
voltage from this oacillator goes both to the harmonic generator amplifier -
of its off ice and along the synchronizing channel to the harmonic generator
_ amplifier of the opposite office (office B).
Let us consider the synchronizing frequency transmission channel. At the
transmitting office the 8 kilohertz reference frequency voltage reaches the
differential transformer TP2. From the firat output of this transformer
the lock-on voltage is fed through the attenuator Udll to the harmonic
generator of its own office. The second output is connected through the
attenuator Ud12 to the band filter II-8. On passing through the filter, the
8 kilohertz voltage goes to the group channel and to the other with the
high-frequency signal is transmitted through the routine filter D-280 and
the line transformer to the line. This voltage goes through the line
together with the group signal of off ice A(12-248 kilohertz). In the
presence of re~peater stations the synchronizing voltage passea through them,
and it goes to the line transformer of the terminal office B, to the routing
filter D-280, the band filter II-8 and the input transformer o~ the harmonic
- generator. _
In order that the 8 kilohertz aynchronizing frequency voltage deaigned for
- operation of the generating equipment not go together with the multichannel
signal to the group receiving channel of the office and not cause overload-
ing of it, the P-8 filter is installed (the band-elimination f ilter). The
fork of the PII-8 filters ia connected to the group channel between the D-280
filter and the group repeater.
31
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
n ~;o ~9) r~r ~S) ~~~,o; .
. ~ /t
1d/ ` re~
\ 8 ~ i~P6 jvp,S ~ +1 ~
1~~ ~ ~ 8) '
(ZT) ~ ~ - o
~ L) ~o
9au-�'e1d~ ~l ~i 'Oj .
~ /-U ,^'y, ~ � ra. 0-f/
, (tT~ `L) sa
i~~~e ~
r-d sQi~-� o %L ~~d �
_ - _1 i ~ r----
n nV ~ ~
G N -
_ ~iP/ BgT I y H N} I ~B/ 0' � I~~( 2I 08Z-U ~6/ _
~ ~ ~ j \l ,w ~l ~ D
I
4JY O/u n' !G ~ ~Y N ~n!
d~ p 11 ~ l Z�,y d I I ~ d Oal�N 'Z~
- ~Oi~
rynN~v~nou 9 u~~ inANam~ taNg~~mnrn~v ra.~,~our6x~wcb~ /rufiaop~0~u/ y~,~~
. (6)
Figure 6.16., Synchronization channel of the generating equipment
Key: ~
1. Office A(transmitting) 9. Intermediate repeater
2. GUs = group repeater 10. Office B(receiving)
- 3. P~=-5.22 decibels 11. P~ -17 decibels
4. Ud12 attenuator 12. P~=-22 decibels
5. ZG master oscillator (basic)
6. ZG master oscillator (reserve)
7. Harmonic generator (basic) _
8. Harmonic generator (reserve)
r
. R~s
~~S Ri C z ~Pf R~~ nf r QOi fp C~! r e
~~7 j01 Q' a t4 ~~Cr CS ` I NA'~ "~-0
~ Q ~l d !n~ ? R N[vemMM! ' �
nj.i. ~R R z tOp.vGW:lKL'(~~
s: ?
R . ~6Rg R!p Rr~
A~ t ~ r`'
j _ .
RJ /N~ CA- C ~ pn I~-i~ .
? _ C
, p 1 ~i7' rntGOxe~rr ---.-p_ - ~rm
e
t ~ 2~
6 ' J tNCOC.nCP ` ~ tDONOnu~u
n ~n , ~ rcaWaNU.~ ~ 3 ~ � ~ ~ `
NO oK 1 _ J
,~"4~~1 ~c~~ ~ - - - - - - - -
Figure 6.17. Ha.rmonic genetator
- Key:
1. Odd harmonics
2. Even harmonics .
3. Reserve harmonic generaCor
4. -24 volts
5. to PK
32
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
,
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
The attenuation of the attenuatora Udl and Ud2 have a value insuring the
required voltage for lock-on at the input of the harmonic generator
independently of the method of aupplying it: from the generator itself or
- over the synchronizing channel. -
On the large city telephone networks a united centralized synchronization
- system has been organized which is set up so that the synchronizing voltage
- is generated by one generator and is distributed with reapect to all points -
where the KRR equipment is installed. Special synchronization network units
are installed here~ by means of which the required parametere of this voltage
- are insured. The master oacillators of the bays of KRR equipment are not
used in this case.
- Harmonic Generator
The harmonic generator is a frequency multiplier which generates voltages
with frequencies that are a multiple of the reference frequency of 8 kilo- .
hertz. The harmonic generator includes two modules: the amplifier module -
and the nonlinear system module. The purpose of the amplifier is to bring
the reference voltage power to the.required value for normal operation of
the nonlinear system. The purpoae of the nonlinear system is to insure
the required shape of the output r.urrent.
The circuit diagram of the harmonic generator is presented in Fig 6.17.
= The amplifier is made in accordance with the three-stage circuit from two
6Zh1P tubes and two 6P3S tubes. The f irs~ stage based on the 6Zh1P tube
operates as a resonance voltage amplifier. A small voltage is fed to the
control grid of the tube L1 from the master oscillator of its office or
over the synchronizing channel. The anode load of this stage is an oscilla-
tory circuit made up of the'capacitor CZ and the primary winding of the
transformer Tpl. On a frequency of 8 kilohertz, current resonance takes
place in the circuit. The circuit resistance and the voltage drop on the
circuit become maximal. This permits us to obtain the greatest gain only
for 8 kilohertz voltage, which is especially significant when operating the ~
harmonic generator from the voltage coming over the synchronizing channel.
In this case, in addition to the 8 kilohertz frequency the incoming signal -
can also contain components with other frequencies. The resonance ampli-
fier permits filtration of the 8 kilohertz voltage to remove the other _
frequency components. ~
The voltage amplified by the �irst tube is ~ed to the input of the second -
tube and simultaneously through the recti~ying bridge to the polarized
relay P. The relay in the operating state picke up the -24 volt locking
_ voltage by its contacfs from the controlling grids of the secand and third
stages and puts out the signa.l light on the panel of this module. In the
absence o~ a master (synchronizing) voltage at the output of the first
- stage, the relay is tripped, and the~module does not generate the character- ~
- istic voltage, the frequency of which in this case would be unstable.
33
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY _
Without an external signal the second tube, as indicated below, genexates
a voltage with a frequency corresponding to the parameters of its oscillatory
circuit. Thus, the signal tube, on being put out, indicates the presence
of a frequency of 8 kilohertz at the input of the module.
The second stage is also executed from the 6Zh1P tube and it operates in the -
generator mode with lock-on. The oscillatory circuit of this generator has
a trimmer C9. The resonance frequency of the circuit is close to 8 kilohertz.
Under the effect of the external synchronizing voltage the frequency of the
oscillation generated by the tube is stabilized, reaching the require value. -
The third output stage is the resonance power amplifier executed from two
6P3S tubes by the two-cycle circuit. The variable resistor R5 regulates i
_ the output level of the signal to the value required for operation of the
nonlinear system. Tl~e basic element of the nonlinear system of the harmonic ~
= generator (Fig 6.18a) is the nonlinear coil HK, to which a powerful signal
is fed from the output of the amplifier through the auxiliary f iltering
circuit Dpll, C1 . The coil is wound on a ferrite ring having a rectangular i-
- hysteresis loop ~(Fig 6.18b). This nature of magnetization means that the ,
- saturation state of the core occurs not smoothly, but sharply, as soon as
- the current in the coil reaches the saturation current of ig.
Inasmuch as the inductance of the coil L is defined as the variation of the ~
magnetic flux per unit time ~~/~t, it~will be the largest at.those times -
when the core magnetization curve increases or decreases, that is, when the
- current still has not reached a value of ig, for which the variation of the _
magnetic flux is stopped, and the inductance drops to zero. As a result of
sharp transition of the core of the coil HK to the saturation state, its
inductance will change just as sharply from the maximum value of Lp to the
minimum value Lg, and the resistance from Zp to ZH differing from each _
other by no less than 1000 times.
The nonlinear system operates as follows. Until the reference signal current
builds up, varying according to a sinusoidal law, the core is not saturated, _
- the coil resistance HK is high, and the ~urrent does not in practice flow
through it. At this time the capacitor C12 is charged. When the current
reaches a value of ig, the inductive resistance of the coil decreases
sharply which in this case shunts the voltage source, and the charge -
capacitor C12 is discharged through the load Tp. The voltage of the discharge
current is opposite to its direction when charging. Then with a decrease
in the current the capacitor is again charged, and with a value of it equal -
to -ig, it is again discharged in the opposite direction. As a result, the ~
current pulses of positive and negative polarity flow through the load
(Fig 6.18c). The circuit parameters are selected so that the capacitor
discharge will take place very fast. The current pulse generation in the
load is less than 2 microseconds for the pulse amplitude of 60 volts. This
insures a large number of harmonics with slowly decreasing amplitude in
the output current.
34
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFP'ICIAL USE ONLY
- . Q~ ~ p ~ ~ ~p'
0"r~~
Om Hevemn ~u ~3~
_ ycunumean yK O6~rP~
(1) tty[Pcmc~�
zapMaNUK 2
1p1
~ 'lemneiu ~4~
~~~od
~ b~j B .
.:jN .~M i .
� " fC ' . i
_ . ~ ' �
` .
, *~h r~eyemN ~5~
.~h ax
c ~
- ' vemn
- ~ Odix ~6~
_ � ` ~M(Ix~
o '
v `
� CN "M ~ t
0
. ~
~ , .
Figure 6.18. Nonlinear system of the harmonic generator and
explanation of its oper.ating principle
_ Key: ~ .
_ 1. From the harmonic generator amplif i~r
- 2. HK nonlinear coil
3. Odd output of the harmonic generator
- 4. Even output of the harmonic generator ~
5. Odd out.put
- 6. Even output
It was indicate~ above that the curxent o~ thie shape contains only the
odd harmonics. In order to obtain even haxtnonica in the harmonic generator
circuit there is a second, even output through the load bridge inauring
- double halfperiod rectification, and consequently, frequency doubling.
The current at the bridge output has the shape of a unipolar curve contain- -
ing only the even harmonics of the basic frequency of 8!kilohertz.
The filters of the odd generators of the'.individual carriers are connected
' to the odd output of the harmonic generator, and to the even, the filters
of the even generators GIN and the filter UGN. From th~e circuit it ia ~
r
~ 35 ~
- FOR OFPICIAL USE ONLY -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
obvious that both outputs are connected to the various diagonals of the
rectifying bridge. This decreases the mutual effect between the GIN, that
is, it increases the protection between them. In the generating equipment
c~C the~ otflcc there zre two harmonic generators: basic and reserve. On
operation of one of them, the anode voltage is picked up automatically from
the other.
. Individual Carrier Generator GIN
The individual carrier generator (Fig 6.19) generates a voltage of individual
carrier frequency required to feed the channel converters. A narrow-band
f ilter tuned to a frequency of the corresponding harmonic of the reference
frequency of 8 kilohertz is connected at the input of the GIN. From the
filter output this voltage is fed through the matching transformer to the
controlling grid of the 6Zh1P tube operating in the generator mode with
lock-on. The magnitude of this voltage is sufficient for reliable lock-on
of the GIN on drift of its natural frequency from the calculated one by
+2 kilohertz. The natural frequency of the generator is determined by the
parameters of the oscillatory circuiC made up of the capacitor C3 and the
primary winding of the transformer Tpl. With respect to its eff ect the
generator encon?passed by the external voltage is equivalent to the narrow-
band filter plus an amplif ier. In order to decrease the effect of the load
variation on the frequency stabtlity of the GIN, the transformer is loaded
on the attenuator R4, R5, R6, R8, R12 permitting regulation of the output
_ voltage without variation of the output resistance of the generator. The
variable resistor Rg permits regulation of this voltage within the limits
from 1.0 to 1.4 volts for a rated value of 1.2 volts.
. R~ Q ~~r RonmN
R6 Oaxnd �
. JP~ R�
/Ij C,~ I RS R~t R~ ~'~i
t~1 C~_ f~a TP R~
f-t---~ .
!3' ~ 1�~~'3� ~Ga~ C `
~ o b R
~~1 ~4~ ~ R~ ft 1
I
rH, R,~
*A
Figure 6.19. Individual carriez generator
Key:
1. Control
36
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
Each GIN is designed to feed the converters of four like channels: one
based on the SIG-1M bay and three on the 5IG-30M bays. During operation
of all four systems of this equipment the reaistors Rg, R10 and R1 1 are
- disconnected. For a load on a amaller number of converters one of the
indicated resistors each is connected to the generator circuit inatead of _
the missing KRR-M system.
In addition to the basic output, the GIN has a control output through the
_ resistor R7 and the toggle switch B. This output is connected to the
monitor which signals when the GIN falls out of synch.
- One GIN module has two generators even or odd channels with the exception
_ of the generators of the 29th 30th channels which are placed in one module.
Group Carrier Repeater UGN -
The group carrier repeater (Fig 6.20) is used for generation of the 70th -
- harmonic of the reference frequency (560 kilohertz) from the even output
of the harmonic generator.and amplification of it to the requireei power.
~
At the repeater input for more reliable voltage filtering there are two
sections of band filters analogous to the f ilters at the input of the GIN. _
The repeater is assembled as a two-stage circuit. The first stage is
executed from the 6Zh1P tube by the resonance circuit. The anode load of
this stage is the parallel circuit L, C4 with resonance at frequencies of
560 kilohertz. The variable resistor R3 is connected to the cathode circuit :
of the tube L1 to regulate the output power of the repeater.
= R~ .
. c, ni a e =
` nm w a 4_ s~ _
,y, ~ ~ - 7 ~I a -
w y J y 4 ? s? 7
R? ~ L ~s ~ Tp 2 .
R3 R R~
2 3 4' �
`J ~5
RB
_ ps � C
e
ai ~a
~q ~ ~ iq ~
rN~ /NI
v ,
Figure 6.20. Group carr~.er repeater
- 37
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
roR orFictaL us~ uaLY
R j
R~
- ~P1 ~ 3 1 ~0~
- .J 4 R
I � ~
rp 1 1 s ,qJ , Rr0
~
~ 4 R1 RO
' ,pn -
R~ ~P~ ~ 1
, S ,
~ ~ ~ R7
- ~ 9 '
/'a~ R
Figure 6.21. 560 kilohertz repeater differential system
The second stage the power amplif ier is also executed by the resonance
circuit from two 6P9 type tubes which are connected in parallel to increase
the output powei. -
~ In order to avoid the transient effects between the group converters of -
- different syst~ms, the group carrier is not fed directly from the repeater -
to the group converters, but it is f e3 through the decoupling diff s_:ential
~ system (Fig 6.21). The diff erential system of the group carrier r~~eater is
made up of three diff erential transformers Tpl, Tp2, Tp3 which are struc-
turally arranged in another module. The transformer Tpl separates the output
of the receiver into two circuits connected to different diagonals of its
bridge circuit. The transfoxmers Tp2 and Tp3 divide each of these circuits
- again into two in like manner. As a result, four outputs well decoupled
- from each other are formed, from each of which tite voltage is fed to its ~
own group converter. The magnitude of this voltage is 1.2 volts, just as
in the group converter itself. If only one system of the KRR-M equipment
is in operation, the resistors R9' R10~ R11 ~st be put in.
In the SIG-1 bay there are two UGN modules: basic and reserve. The outputs :
are connected in parallel to a common load. On operation of�one of them,
the anode voltage is automatically picked up from t~e other.
Generating Equipment Monitor ~
The monitor is used for continuous observation of the operation~of the GIN
and it signals if any of them drops out of synch. The control outputs of
all o~ the i.ndividual carrier generators are connected through large
decoupl3.ng resistances to the input o~ the monitor (Fig 6.22). The f irst
_ sta~e executed from the 6Zh1P tube ampli~ies the entire complex input -
signal to a value at which the diode D1 connected between the first and
second stages will operate reliably as a nonlinear ele~uent. It is known
- that if the nonlinear element falls under the e�fect of volCages of different -
38
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY ~
_
_ ~ d.
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
I
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
frequencies fl, f2, f3,... then harmonics appear in the circuit from -
unly initial frequencies of the type: 2f1, 2f2, 2f3,..., 3f1, 3f2, 3f3,..., -
4f1 , 4f.2, 4f~ und also all possible combination frequenctes, sum and _
dii f erence, of the following type: �l�f 2, f L�f3 , 3f L�2f 2, 2f y�3f 2, and so
on, which can be written in general fornt ae mf~+nfb, where m and n are
- any integers, and fa and fb are any frequencies reaching the input of the
- module.
' T 4 L~ L , -
_ ,q? ~2 Cs ~ r ~9 T
'/1
~ n1 411 C 4 .,q R~cRi
~j jp~7y ' ~ .
_ R~ ~ 4 p A
Q~
S S ,qf R3 R~ ~
, 4 )
Ry H R~ 1 ,ny
_ ! Cs 2 . 1 1
` R/ ~ -
' ~ .QP~S. ~4
_ ~'~i-s
Figure 6.22. Monitor
All of these frequencies go to the secon3 6Zh1P tube for further amplifica-
tion. For normal operation of the GIN, all of the frequencies generated
by them are multiples of 8 kilohertz. In this case, among the entire
se~ of frequencies f ed to the tube L�2, none will oGCUr which will be less
than 8 kilohertz. Actually, any carrier, and more so the harmonics, will
be greater than 8 kilohertz. Any summed combination frequency mfa+nfb will
, also be greater than 8 kilohertz. Only the combination frequency formed
- by the difference of two ad~acent carriers will be equal to 8 kilohertz.
This is the basis for the structure of the monitoring circuit.
The D-4,0 filter which passes currents with frequencies only up to 4 kilo- -
hertz is connected at the output of the second stage. During normal opera-
tion of all the GIN there will not be a single frequency which will pass
through the f ilter. If any GIN falls out of synch. , that is, ,begins to
~ generate a frequency that is not a multiple of 8 kilohertz, then a differ-
ence combination frequen~y of less than 4 kilohertz will appear. The
signal of this frequency will ga thzough the D-4,0 filter, it will be -
rectified, amplified with respect to DC current by the transistorized
stage and �orce the response o� the polarized relay P1. This relay closes
the circuit o~ the relay P2 by its contact, it switches on a red signal
- light and switches off a green signal light on the panel of the KY monitor
module. The relay F2 createa a general-bay e~nergency signal circuit.
39 ~
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
_ Gxample, Let GIN No 3 begin to generate at 329 kilohertz instead of 328 -
kilohertz. Let us take two difference frequencies: F3-F2=329-320=9 kilo-
hertz and F2-F1=320-312=8 kilohertz. These two combination frequencies
create new frequencies: 9+8=17 and 9-8=1 kilohertz. The frequency of -
1 kilohertz passes through the D-4,0 f ilter and the above-described signal
- response.
The GIN that has fallen out of synch must be disconnected from the trans-
ceivers. In order to f ind this GIN, it is necessary to disconnect the
monitor outputs from the KY in the GIN modules until the red light goes
out and the green light burns again.
Signal Frequency Generator
- The signal frequency generator (Fig 6.23) is the only generator not
connected with the harmonic system of the generating equipment, for the _
- frequency of 3.8 is not a multiple of 8 kilok~ertz. The generator is made
as a two-stage circuit.
The f irst stage based on the 6Zh1P tube operates as an autooscillation
generator assembled by the three-point circuit. The oscillatory circuit
_ C1, C2, C13, L is connected to the circuit between the control and screen-
ing grids of t~e tube. The midpoint of the circuit is cannected to the
cathode. These three electrodes play the role of the autooscillation
exciter. The oscillations which occur are amplified then by the anode cir-
cuit of the tube loaded on the oscillatory circuit C5, C8, C9 and the "
primary winding of the transformer Tpl. This circuit, just as the first,
is tuned to a frequency of 3.8 kilohertz.
The second stage a power amplifier is executed from two 6Zh1P tubes
by the double-cycle circuit, as a result of which the characteristics of
the amplifier are improved, and the nonlinear distortions are decreased.
The two-cycle output requires complete symmetry of the circuit, and since
in practice it is impossible to have entirely identical parameters of the -
- two halves of the circuit, including two tubes, the halfwindings of the
transformer and the other parts, additional measures are being taken to
improve the amplifier characteristics. In parallel with ttie primary wind-
ing of the output transformer a circuit is included which is made up of
the series-included inductance coil L2 and capacitor C12. This circuit
_ with resonance voltages on the third harmonic of the basic oscillation
has minimum resistance on it and shunts the output. The even harmonics
are destroyed by the two-cycle circuit. -
- The capacitors C10~ ~11 and the primary winding of the output transformer -
together make up a parallel circuit tuned to the basic signal frequency
of 3.8 kilohertz at which the repeater also gives the greatest gain.
40
~ FOR OFFICI,A~. dJSE. DNLY � ~
_ , ~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
' n1
R ~PJ
~f ~i I Om0o0 R/ ~ it 0
_ ~f C A !n ~i~ ' ~ Gt ~ Ri
. ' t~
1
R~ A C Rio Pn~
K J I I
~ ~i ~ R~il .
~ y - ~J
_ Ri !n~ . '
, AP
. i
_ s-
~A
Figure 6.23. Signal frequency generator
Key:
1. Shunt
The output level of the generator is regulated by the potentiomer R12.
On a load of 16 ohms, the mriximun voltage can be 3 volts. The signal
- frequency generatdr load is 120 static relays. The out~ut power distribu-
tion of the generator between the static relays of the four systems of _
equipment is realized by decoupling resistors located in a separate module
of the generating equipment.
Monitoring the Operation and Switching of the Generator Equipment Assemblies -
- For greater operating reliability all modules are redundant in the generating
equipment except the GIN an.d the monitor. For automatic switching of the
equipment from ~he basic to ttie reserve there are special relay assemblies
connected with the signal system of the ISG-1M bay. The switching and
_ signal elements are located on the protection and signal plates (the ZIS
plate) and also directly in the generating equipment modules. The switch~ng
of the equipment from the reserve modules to the basic ones is done manually
by using buttons also located on the ZIS plate. The switching from basic
to reserve is automatic.
Let us consider the operation of the relay assemblies. The diagram of the
relay assembly of thE signa,l ~requency generator is depicted in Fig 6.24.
The assembly is made up o~ the ~~g~g polaxized relay, two RPN type tele-
phone relays: ~B and PD, thxee s~.gnal lights, the button KH, the rectifier
- bridge BM and the diodes. The opezation o~ the complex goea as follow~.
- In the first step when the electric power is,~~.aw~tc~hed on~ the voltage at
the output of the generatar of the signal part ie inauff icient for operation
of the polarized relay ~G3~8, the aruiature of which is on the right etop. -
The R-A contacts of the relay PG_g~g close the operating circuit of the
relay PB: "ground," armature A, right contact of the relay P~g~g then
41
�FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
: n s~ sz -14B P
, (1
.
, (16~> ~a,e~ ~ ~
~l BM (10)
' a~ r h
- (n~l
r38o
N 11~ � Q 5 !
1( ~ - -148
. ,37
~ + !(N 7 ~ .
i i
1le~r Offarecmaevn Kcrosm ~
- a~4u0a~ crruranua Aene ~ 6)
- ~2) ~3) ~4)oc
B p
3~ ~ .
~5) ~f3~~~8)
n
_ -24B y
n(6~n).~9)
Figure 6.24. Relay switching complex of the G-3,8 kilohertz
_ generator -
Key: ~
l. -24 volts 9. Signal light (white) - L(Bel)
2. No ring 10. Signal ~,ight (red) L(Kr)
3. General bay signa.l 11. G-3,8 basic generator _
= 4. To the static relay IZ. Bridge rectifier
5. G-3,8 basic 13. R- right
6. G-3,8 reserve 14. A- armature
- 7. But ton 15 . L- lef t
8. Signal light (green) - 16. PG-3,8
L (Zel) -
parallel to the relays Pg and PD, -24 volts. The red signal light L(Kr) _
lights simultaneously. The relay PB closes the emergency signal circuit
in the SIG-1M bay and the external "no ring" s~.gnal by its contacts 11-12
and~,51-52. -
The~relay PD, responding, closes the circuit of its restraining coil 4-5 by -
~ts contacts 31-32; by the contacts 52-53 it prepares the voltage feed
circuit from the output o� the reserve module to the load; by contacts 12-13
it closes the circuit to light, the white signal light L(Bel).
In the second step of operation, the voltage at the output of the reserve
module reaches the normal value. The polarized relay P~g~g responds and
switches the armature to the left contact. This brakes the circuit of the
_ relay Pg, which, tripping its armature, removes the emergency general-bay
signal and the "no ring" signal. In addition, the~contacts of the relay
P~3 8 brake the circuit of the tube Ll and the operating winding of the
- relay P~. However, this relay does not trip its armature, for its restrain-
ing coil'remains under current.
42
FOR O~FICIAL USE ONL�Y
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
In order to switch the load from the reserve generator to the basic ~
generator it:i~ necessary to press the button KH. Then the relay PD is
tripped, by its contacts it switches the load to the basic module and -
switches on the green light L(Zel).
If the basic generator G-3,8 fails during operation, the polarized relay
PG-3 8 is tripped which, throwing the armature to the right contact, .
crea~es the operating circuit of the relay PD. The contacts 52-53 of the
relay PD connect the load to the output of the reserve module, and the
contacts 12-13 connect the signal light L3.
The relay Pg (emergency signal) does not succeed in responding in this case, -
for the relay P~3~g immediately throws its armature as soon as voltage
begins to go from the reaerve module to the rectifyin~ bridge. If the
signal also drops on the reserve module output, then the contacta 11-12
and 51-52 of the relay PB close the emergency signal circuit and the "no
ring" signal.
The diode D1 prevents response of the "no ring" signal from the voltage _
coming to the general bay signal over the other emergency signa.l circuits.
The operation of the relay asseml~lies of the harmonic generator and tne
group carrier repeater will be considered ~ointly.
These assemblies (Fig 6.25) include the golarized relay PUGN~ three RPN .
type relays: the Prr relay, the contacts of which connect +250 volts of =
anode voltage either to the basic or to the reserve harmonic generator;
the relay Pg which switches +250 volts of anode voltage to the basic or
the reserve module of tlie group carrier repeater, and the relay PA which _
includes the emergency signal with respect to two lights for the harmonic
generator and the gro.up carrier repeater and two buttons. -
Before the appearance of a voltage at the output of the harmonic generator _
and, consequently, the group carrier repeater module, the polarized relay
PUGN connected through the rectifying bridge to the outputs of the basic
_ and reserve group carrier repeaters does not operate. The armature pUGN
is at the right contact, the operating windings of the relays PA and PB
are deenergized, by the quiescent contacts 11-12 51-52 the relay PA
forms the general bay signal circuit, and also the operating winding circuit
1-2 of the relay PPr�
The relay ~rr responds and is blocked by its contact 31-32 forming the
circuit ~or the winding 4-5; the contacts 52-53 are used to f eed.+250 volts
to the anodes and the shielding grids o~ the tubes 6P3S of the output
stage o~ the harmonic generator ampl~.~ier; the contacts 12-13 are used
to include the tube L1 0~ the hairmor.ic generator complex.
43
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
Thus, in the first step the reserve harmonic generator amplifier is _
prepared for operation. From the two group carrier repeater modules, the -
reserve is also prepared for operation, for the quiescent contacts of rl~e
relay Pg are used to feed +250 volts to the anodes and the shielding grids
of the tubes 6P9 of the output stage of the UGN [group carrier amplifier].
The operation of the reserve module is noted by the white light burning on
the UGN complex.
- 513153 n r1/3 3i 31 Q
~ ~ N.Yp 5 4
~4) ~ ~ 2 ~ F~r
~1~ +1508 AiG~i') -148 As(Ka~6~ -1k8
oe~.rr veatr _ (9)
_ (2) (3~ GnoK~r ~ ' ~
_ . ~ocy _ ~ ~
~
� 06mecmaNJ. ~
r8` C42N. i~ _
p ~ ~
~ ! 2 q ~1.7)
. - ---~pr ~18) .
(10~ i BM ~ 1 3 ~19)
. I~
~ ~ ~ �
~ r, .
(12) ; Kdumcu~� ~ ~ ~-f-'r .
; neHe. _
~�Bra~9 I 1=rg " ~
_ (13) ~ I~ c~n t - 3i .
(14) ~ ~ ~
I ii ~~1
(15) ~ pe3 , ~ . 5z
' I -
1 ~ i 6noK du~.
~ ~ cucmer+ ~ ~
l P6 .
31 ~
Rn~ 31 .95(KPJ (24~
. l!
!2 -24
If pC3C~'QnDNy 11
(20) yrn `~i
.~-~c n4(3en1 ~2 ~ � ,
_ (21) K ocno9noMy F~~+psaB
yrN 3
~ ~ 22 ~ 3eMnA om y~H oCN. 34 ~
Figure 6.25. Relay assen4bly ~or switching the harmonic generator _
and the group carrier repeater
Key:
1-- -F250 volts; 2-- Basic harmonic generator; 3-- Reserve harmonic
generator; 4-- L~(Zel) Green signal light; 5-- -24 volts;
6-- L6(Kr) red signal light; 7-- basic harmonic generator
module; 8--general office signal; 9-- - 24 volts; 10 rectifying -
bridge; 11 --PUGN~ 12 To Che differential system; 13 - UGN output;
14 basic; 15 - reserve; 16 differential system module;
17 right;l8 armature; 19 - left; 20 To the reserve UGN; '
21 To the basic UGN; 22 Ground from tlie basic UGN; 23 Green
signal light; 24 Red signal light
44
FOR OF~`IEI~,~ UgE- ON~Y~~ -
. ~ '
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
In the second s*ep of operation after heating of the generator equipment
tubes, the 70th harmonic goes from the output o� the reserve harmonic
generator, it is amplified by the reserve group carrier repeaters, and it
. is fed to the rectifying bridge. The polarized relay PUGN reaponds, and
it throws its armature to the left contact. The PA relay circuit closes,
and the PB relay response circuit is prepared. The relay PA reaponda,
and by its contact 31-32 it ahorti circuita ita own winding 1-2, which
- slows the tripping; the contacts 11-12 and.51-52 break the ~mergency signal
circuit and the circuit of the operating winding of the PGG relay.
For conversion to the basic modules it is necessary to press the buttons
- KH1 and KH2. On pressing the button KHZ the relay Pg responds and it is
blocked by its own contacts 31-32; by the contacts SZ-53 the anode voltage
, of +250 volts is fed to the basic module of the group carrier repeater, -
and by the contacts 13-12 the tube L4 of the UGN complex is included.
When the button KH2 is pressed, the relay PG~ trips, the contacts of which _
send +250 volts to power the tubes af the basic GG [harmonic generatorJ
module, and the tube L~ of the GG complex is switched on.
- On failure of the basic harmonic generator, the group carrier amplifier
simultaneously stops working. The relay PUGN is tripped. The relay PA is _
- also tripped, but with a delay as a result of the shunt on its winding
1-2. This delay in tripping the relay PA is needed so that in the case of
accidental short-term surges of group carrier voltage its contacts will not ~
switch.
- The relay PB also trips its armature, the anode voltage is switched to the
reserve amplifier, and the light L,5 of the UGN complex burns. The relay PGG
responds, switches the anode voltage to the reserve harmonic generator,
the light L6 burns, the general-bay emergency signa.l operates. The relay
assembly operates analogously on failure of the group carrier repP~ter.
_ Thus, when there is a failure in the basic harmonic generator or the group
carrier repeater the switching to the reserve module takes place jointly.
In this case the lights L6 and L5 burn, and the general bay signal goes into -
_ operation.
When the harmonic generator stops operating as a result of damage to the
ZG master oscillator modules or w.hen the synchronizing frequency stops
from the other office the signal lights burn on both of the harmonic
generator modules, and the emergency signal reaponds.
The diagram of the relay assembly of the master oscillator is analogous =
_ to the diagram o~ the relay assembly of the signal frequency generator,
and it is not described here. -
' 45
FaR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
r�uK ur�r�1c,.aL u~~ uNLr
6.8, liitcrme~liate Repeater Stations
Th~ intermediate repeater stations ar~ installed to increase the communica-
tions range over the trunk and they are designed to compensate for attenua-
tion and frequency-amplitude distortions introduced by the preceding section
of the cable circuit.
The section of the cable circuit included between two adjacent repeater
stations is called the repeater section. The length of a repeater section
depends on the physical properties of the cable and the type of multiplexing
equipment. When determining the admissible length of the repeater section ~
we begin with the f act that its attenuation must~:be numerically equal to the
gain of the repeater statiQn. The latter is determined on the basis of the -
minimum and maximum transmission levels permissible in the circuit.
In the KRR-M equipment the diff erence between the maximum and minimum group
signal levels can be 50.9 decibels (5.85 nepers) at the highest frequency
of 548 kilohertz. This means that the gain of the repeating station and,
consequently, the attenuation of the repeating section can also be 50.9 deci-
- bels. For the MKS type cable this corresponds to a length of 13 km.
The composition of the equipment installed at the tandem office is determined -
by its purpose compensation of the attenuation and the frequency-amplitude ~
distortions introduced by the repeater section. For this purpose repeaters
are used with a set of equalizing circuits. The KRR-M equipment is a
two-band communications system; therefore the routing filters D-280 are -
- installed at the repeater station. For matching the equipment of the tandem
station with the cable circuit, line transformers are installed at the _
input and output of the station.
~Z-14B -56,35. -
- ~ -
- i -
ti ~e ~ ~ -
Q-?80 BK ryc, Q-?B~
lllp ~1~ ~1~ /ITp
-7J,13 ~
~
i
x Q d6 a ~
� R�?BD fycr B~r B'Jc1. K-1C0
. ,fl. -548
Figure 6.26. Structural diagram o~ the intermediate repeater
station of the KRR
M equipment
Key:
. 1. Line transformer
dia ram o� the re eater station is shown in Fig 6.26. In I~
The structural g P
theldirection of transmission o~ the lower frequency group (12-248 kilo-
hertz) the group signal, pas~ing througlx the line transformer LTp and the
- ~
' 46
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
.a1J:l'./ lllli! ~'4~�i_t'V.a..f'1V JAt?.f
,
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
routing filter D-280, is amplified by the group repeater 1'Yc1 and it is
equalized by the set of equalizing circuit sectione. By means of attenuators ~
and continuous gain control the transmission level at the ou~put of the
group repeater is set equal to -6.65 decibels (-0.65 nepers). The routing
filter D-280 and line transformer are included after the repeater, on
passing through which the frequency apectrum of 12-248 kilohertz is trans-
- mitted to the next repeater section.
In the direction of transmission of the upper frequency group of 312-548
kilohertz, the schematic of the repeater station completely corresponda to
the schematic of the receiving channel of the terminal office A. Between
the routing filtere K-280 at the input an.d output of the station a group
repeater GYc2 and auxiliary repeater BYc2 are included. If the length of =
the trunk of the I~IIZS type is less than 12.5 km, the auxiliary repeater can
- be left off. By using attenuators and continuous gain control the trans-
mission level of this direction is fed equal to -21.75 decibels (-0.25 nepers).
For equalizing the frequency-amplitude distortions of the signal the spare
parts kit for the intermediate station has elements of line equalizers -
for the frequency range of 12-248 kilohertz by 1.74, 3.48, 10.44, 13.82 -
decib~ls and for the frequency range of 312-548 kiloherCz by 3.48, 5.65, -
7.83 decibels. -
_ ltao repeater stations and a feed plate are installed on each bay of inter-
mediate repeaters. The layout of the plate is considered below.
6.9. Group Channel Equipment '
The group channels of the terminal offices of the KRR-M equipment contain
the following: group and auxiliary repeaters, group converters, line
transformers, group and routing filters. The intermediate repeater stations
- are made up of line transformers, routing filters, group and auxiliary
repeaters.
All of the group equipment modules are four-terminal networks with input
and output impedances of 75 ohms. The line transformers calculated for ~
operation between loads of 75 and 160 ohms constitute an exception.
- In the KRR-M equipment the group and auxiliary repeaters of two typea are -
used: the lower frequency group GYcl and BYcl and the upper frequency
group GYc2 and BYcz designed to ampli�y the currents in the spectral from
12 to 248 kilohertz and �rom 312 to 548 kilohertz, respectively. The like
_ repeaters for the lower and upper �reque~cy groups do not di�fer from each
other either in structural or in schetaatic respects. Only the ratings of
the individual elements are di�ferent. All of the repeaters, with the -
exception of BYcl are used at the type A and type B terminal offices and
also at the intermediate repeater stations. The auxiliary repeater of
the lower frequency group BYcl is installed only at the type B terminal
offices.
- 47
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- FOR OFFICIAL US~ UNLY
When using repeaters at the terminal offices the filaments of the repeater
tubes are included in parallel, and when using this at the intermediate
repeater stations the filaments of the repeater tubes of the two repeater
stations (four group and two auxiliary) are connected in series.
The feed for the repeaters of the terminal offices is from the group
equipment power pack PITGUc, and the intermediate stations, from the MP
local power or DP remote power plate. -
Let us consider the schema.tic diagra~m of the group repeater GYcl at
- 12-248 kilohertz (Fig 6.27). The repeater is assembled by the three-stage
circuit from four 6Zh1P tubes. At the input of the repeater is a step-up
transformer with transformation coefficient of 1:7. Its purpose is to
match the output of 30 channel transmitters with high-resistance input of
the repeater tube. The required magnitude of the input impedance of the
repeater of 75 ohms is achieved using the resistors R26, R1 included in
parallel to the transformer windings. The repeater is assembled with
respect to the rheostat-capacitive circuit (the repeater based on resistors).
The individual elements of the stages have the following purpose: the
resistor R3 is the anode load of the first stage from which the amplified
voltage is picked up and it is fed to the following stage (in the second
stage the anode load is Rlp). The resistor R2 and the capacitor C1 consti-
tute the f eed filter of the anode, and the resistor R6 and the capacitor C2,
the f eed f ilter of the shielded grid (in the second stage R9, C4 and R15~
C6, respectively). The required magnitude of the feed voltages of the
anodes and the shielded grids of the tubes L1 and L2 is insured by means
of these resistors.
~ R24 ~p ~1 J
G1 , r150D
RI R~ R1 ~'��I Rl3 R7S 11~
J= ~
R,~ Rs r4 7G ~13 ~
~ ~ J
~0~ ~3 ' Re - R~g : ~ -L
~`j~I i~ ~6 ~ . ~e ~9 ~io
R161i~ I ~ ~t r;
ti~
~r ~ S R~ P4 ~SZ ~'il Rf6 R, .
.0
~ R !y~ . R~ Pyj .
.i, , ~H3
C T R~~ R� Rt .
i
I
KI-k~ R~y
�
Figure 6.27. Group repeater ~or 12-248 kilohertz
Key:
1. +150 volts
48
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
The resistors R4 and R5 create automatic bias on the control grid of the
tube L1 and simultaneously negative current feedback in the first stege.
Here a significant role is played by the reaistor R4, for R5 has a small
value and is used to measure the cathode current of the tube in the aocket
I'Hl .
In the second stage for measuring the current in the socket TH2 the
resistor R12 is used; the automatic bias is provided by the resistor R11
- which for the variable component of the current is shunted by the
capacitance C5, as a result of which the negative feedback ia abaent in
this atage.
- The capacitor C3 between the firat and second atages is aeparating; R~ is
the leakage resistance of the second stage.
_ The third stage the power amplifier is made from two tubes included _
in parallel., Using the resistor R20, a bias and neg~tive current f eedback "
are created automatically; the resistor R21 has small resistance and is
used to measure the cathode current common to the tubes L3 and Lq. The
purpose of the remaining resistors and the capacitors is analogous to that
described in the f irst two stages. -
In addition to the individual negative feedback in the first and third
stages, the amplif ier is encompassed by common negative feedback, that is, -
the feedback from the output stage to the input stage. The common feedback
circuit is formed by the II-typ.e four-terminal network made up of the
resistors of the f irst (R4, RS) and the third (R20, R21) stages included ~
in the cathode and connecting the resistors R13, R14' R15'
It is poss~ble to use the variable resistor R13 to smoothly regulate the _
gain of the amplif ier by +4.35 decibels (0.5 nepers) with respect to its
mean value of 49.5 decibels (5.7 nepers). The deep negative feedback
stabilizes the gain and decreases the nonlinear distortions of the amplifier. _
In order to match the output of the amplifier to the subsequent channel
element (see Fig 6.5) a step-down transformer TP2 with transformation
coefficient of 7:1 is used. By means of the resistors R22 and Rz3 the output
impedance of the amplifier becomes equal to 75 ohms. The choke Dp,.the
resistor R24 and the capacitors C9 and C10 are used as the feed ~ilter.
The 12-248 kilohertz repeatexs are installed both on the terminal equipment
bays and at the intermediate repeater stations.
Fig 6.28 shows the diagram of a group repeatex of the upper frequency
group installed :in the receiving channela of the terminal off icea. The
repeatex has a diff erential output transformer permitting two outputs _
uncoupled from each other to be formed �or the even and odd channels.
49
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY _
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR CFFsCIAL USE ONLY
~ ' ~ ,�.J .In
,;~:'6 ~1~ -
Rrr-~
~ ~pI N,,
~p
qs ' I ' .1lr;
i .
'~17 i ~ ~
, R6 A .
i ~
u ~
C~ ~t C~ 11t . 11J r ~r,.~
o y~~~ r,a Y G, R,e _ ~a -r c~, _
- I{~ I CS i ~S ~
.L` R4 Q~ P~+ ~
' Rib RI~ � � ,
. Rt R, rN' ~H7 RI I-
1 4~, lx ~ ~
_ RrJ R~~ 7 I I
ra
Figure 6.28. Group repeater for reception on 312-548 kilohertz
Key :
1. +160 volts
2. 160 volts
_ C3 R7 ~
~)8
~6~38
R~ '
~t 5 I (2~
_ . n~
TPr 4 I B
f E 5 ~2
g~ y RZ Ry C4
Rf
R5
- e
r"'n Re
- Figure 6.29. ~'.uxiliary repeater
Key:
1. +160 volts
2. ~6.3 volts
The auxiliary repeater for the lower �requency group BYcl is executed by
the single-stage circuit (Fig 6.29) fxom the 6Zh1P tube. The purpose of
the individual elements o~ the repeater is analogous to that previously
investigated. The maximum gai,n of the repeatez is equal to 15.6 decibels
(1.8 nepers) and is smoothly regulated by the variable resistor RS forming
current ~eedback. The ad~ustment limits are +OL87 decibels (0.1 nepers).
The diagram of the auxiliary.repeater for the upper frequency group does
not differ theo~etically from that presented and is not considered here.
50
FOR OFFICIAL USE 6NL`I
- I ~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
It was pointed out above that the group multichannel signal running through
the communications channel undergoes different attenuation on different
frequencies. The repeatera amplify all the frequencies identically, that -
is, they have planar gain control. This laads to the appearance of ampli-
tude-frequency distortions of the signal. For correction of the distortions
- introduced by the cable network, the correcting four-terminal networks are
- conn~cted in series to the repeater equalizers with freyuency character-
istics inverse to the~characteristics of the cable network. The equalizers
are made up of aections differing from each other by the steepness of the
slope of the frequency characteristic and the frequency band. The sections
of the equalizera are made of inductance coils of the OR-12 type, mica
capacitors of the SSG and the SMGZ type and resistors of the BLL type with
respect to the unbalanced circuit. The input arcd output impedancea of the
section are equal to 75 ohms. The aections of the equalizers enter into the -
composition of the group repeater modules. Thus, the equalizera of the -
upper group of channels enter into the set of modul~s containing the =
repeaters of the group of channels GYc2 and BYc2. The sections of these
equalizers are made with obliqueness of the attenuation on the lower and -
upper frequencies (312 and 548 kilohertz) by aa: 3.47 (0.4), 5.65 (0.65),
6.9 (0.8) and 8.7 decibels (1.0 nepers). For correction of distortions of
the lower channel ~roup (12-248 kilohzrtz), th~ aet of sections for ~a is
_ used: 3.47 (0.4), 10.4 (1.2), 12,2 (1.4), 13.9 (1.6) 17.4 decibels (2.0
- nepers) .
In the set of equalizers there are also sections designed to correct the
distortions introduced by two series-connected routing filters DK-280, one
of which is connected to the transmitting and the other at the receiving -
_ stations (for example, two filters r~f the D type or two filters of the K
type). The sectior.s of the equalizers are designc:d so that for any length
of the repeater section the distortions introducel by the cable network are
_ compensated by two sections, the distortions of the filters are compensated
by a third section. The fourth section is an attenuator made up of only
ohmic resistances and introducing identical attenuation on all frequencies.
= Step level control of the signal is accompllshed by means of the attenuator.
The required equalizer sections are selected when establishing the level
diagram for the main line including the terminal and the intermediate _
repeater stations.
The DK-280 routing filters are used to separate the transmission and recep- -
tion spectra of the upper and lower frequency groups. Both f ilters are
made structurall in the form of a separate module.
- Inasmuch as both ~ilters are included on the l~ne side in parallel, and the ~
opposite signals have a large level gradient [fox example, -7 decibels
(-0.8 nepers) at the D-280 filter output and -53.9 decibels (-6.2 nepera)
at the K-280 filter input], the �ilter characteristic must insure high -
protection from the crosstalk. Each filter must introduce no lesa than
60.8 decibels (7.0 nepers) of attenuation �or ti~e currents of the effec-
tively transmitted band of the other filter (the D-280 filter in the
312-548 band, and K-280 in the 12-248 kilohertz band). On the frequencies
51 ~
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
I
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
- of. its effectively transmitted band the attenuation of each f ilter must -
not exceed 1.3 decib els (0.15 nepers).
I ~
~ 560 wr,~ ,
Figure 6.30. Group frequency converter =
Key: -
- l. Fg=560 kilohertz
For limitation of the nonlinear distortions, air-gap coils are used in the
filters. When tuning the filter circuits the c~il inductance is regulated
by introducing f errite cor~.
The filter ctrcuit is made up ~f shielded sections of the k and m type.
The housir.g serves as the return wire and the common shield. The module is
connected to the bortom by means of a maximum number af c~nnecting blocks
(6), some of which are connected in parallel. This block commutation per- -
: mits inclusion of the assemblies of the equipment by rearranging the blocks _
- without clianging the intermodular wiring, -
The group converters are installed at the terminal off ices: in the trans-
= mission channel of off ice A and in the reception channel of off ice B. In _
the former case they realize the shift of the group spectrum of 312-548
kilohertz to thz 12-248 kilohertz range, and in the latter case, vice versa.
' The group carrier is 560 kilohertz. '
The converters are assembled in a ring circuit based on di~des of tr.e
_ D2V type, two diodes in each arm (Fig 6.30).
- 6.10. Electric Power Supply for the Equipment -
Equipment Composition
The elertric power supply of the KRR-M equipment comes from the.22p volt
AC network. The power supply ec~uipment is made up of converting trans-
- formers, recti~iers and filters. The tollow3ng feed devices are installed
in the SIG-1M terminal bay: the generating equipment feed plate (PITGO),
the group equipment feed module (repeatQrs) of the 30-channel system
(PITGU), the power pack for the indivi.dual equipment of the 30 channels
(PITIO). In the SIG-30M bay there are group and Individual equipment -
- power packs. In addition, each SIG--1M bay is assigned a ferroresonance
~
52
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
...zr... ~..~v _ ,
. . ~ . ~ . . . ~ . ~ . . . . . . . . ~ . . . ' ~ . ~ '
. . , . . . . . . ~ . . I
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
voltage atabilizer of the 5-0,9 type, the power of which 0.9 kilowatts
ia sufficient for operation o~ one SIG-1M bay, three SIG-30M bays and
the remote feed transmiasion plate. The latter ia executed in the form -
of a sepa~ate device.
The intermediate repeatera can receive power either from a local source
- . (SPU-2M) or remotely (SPU-2D). In the former case the local feed plate
_ I~ is installed, on the intermediate repea~er bay; in the latter case, the -
remote feed plate DP. -
~ The control signal receiver ci~t.cuita PSU of the transceiver module are
. fed from the office batttery at -60 (~'6) volts.
-2
Voltage Stabilization -
During operation of the equipment the network voltage can vary with
~:nsignificant limits. In order that during this variation the vE~ltage
coming to the electric power units of the equipment remain in variant, _
a f erroresonance voltage atabilizer is installed to inaure an output
voltage within the limits of 215-220 volts. _
= The effect of the ferroresonance stabilizer is based on the phenomena of
au~gnetic saturation and voltage reaonance, and it can be explained by
_ Fig 6.31a. The stabilizer contains a transformer with a decreased core
cross section, as a result of which the saturation mode is created in it.
In this mode the inductance oi the prima.ry winding L1 decreases sharply
cvith an increase in current. Subsequently, the capacitor C is connected
_ to the primary winding. The capacitance of this capacitor is selected so
that for the greatest possible voltage in the network the circuit made up
of the series-connected L1 and C will have resonance on a.frequency some-
what above the network frequency of 50 hertz. Thia frequency ia deffned by
the formula fres~1~2~r~'
With a decrease in the network voltage, the current I1 decreases, but the -
inductance L1 increases, and the resonance frequency fr~s is reduced and
_ approaches 5C~ hertz. The reaon,ance condition, as is known, is equality of
- the'generator frequenciea (in the given case the network) and the circuit -
fres� Only in this case will the greatest current slow in the circuit.
Thus, in response to the decrease in the input voltage, the inductance L1 -
increasea, and the resonance frequency decreases, approaching the network
frequency, as a reault o� which the res~stance of the circuit decreasea,
and the current I1 increasea.
With an increase in the input voltage the inductance L1 decreases, and the -
resonance frequency increases and is removed still more from the network -
frequeney. Tn turn, this will increase the circuit reaiatance and decrease
: the current T1. Th~ processes o~ decreasing and increasiag the current
mutually compensate for each other, as a result of which the invariant
value of I1 is maintained, and, conaequently, the output voltage u2 of
the aecondary winding is stabilized (Fig 6.31b).
53 T
- ~ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
,
r~R ~rFtcl~w U5~ UNLY -
C I _
e--~}"
_ ~i ' ~r ~ Ut -
b ~u? .
,
:
- �u;
- Figure 6.31. Explanation of the operating principle of a
~ ferroreson2~nce stabilizer -
Along with the advantages of the ferroresonance stabilizersit is necessary
to consider their basic disadvantages: the shape of the output voltage of ;
- the stabilizsr as a result of its operation in the saturation mode is
distorted, which leads to the appearance of harmonics of the network voltage
frequency; near the stabilizers powerful variable magnetic fields occur
which can create interference; large weight and size with significance power; :
_ high cost; great release of heat.
'
Generating Equipment Feed Plate (PITGO)
The generating equipment feed plate is designed to feed a11~of the generating
modules of equipment. The schematic of a plate is presented in Fig 6.32.
A power transfor.mer is installed on the plate, the second winding of which
is fed an AC voltage of 220 volts from the stabilizer. There are five
secondary windings.
The first winding is used to obtain the AC voltage of 250 volts. This voltage ~
is rectified by the rectif ier (BY1) assembled from silicon diodes, two in
each arm of the bridge for high operating reliability. As a result of
large scattering of the diode parameters, the diodes are shif ted by resistors
which equalize the return voltages betwe~n them. For smoothing the pulsa- -
tions of the rectified current there is a two-~ection choke f ilter Dpl; . ,
DP2; C1-C4. At the filter output 250 volts of DC voltage is formed which is ;
required to �eed the anode circuits and the shielded grids of the powerful
6P3S and 6P9 tubes o~ the output stages of the amplifier modules of the
harmonic generator, the group caxrier repeater an3 the signal frequency _
generator. The output voltage i,s xegulated by the variable resistance R1. _
The current in the load can reach 0.4 amps.
The second output winding is used to obtain an anode voltage of 160 volts
required to f eed the 6Zh1P tubes. .The rectifying bridge BY2 is aasembled ;
from~ the same silicon diodes as BY . The pulsations are smaothed by the
two-section f~lter. The output voltage can be regulated smoothly by the -
resistance R2. The normal load current is 0.35 amps. _
54
FOR OFRICIAL:USE ONLY
. _ _ . .
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
. / ~ -
i?
~v~asa -
ID 'e' o q By, r3 C? ~1 ~a aani ~1~.
- ~i
~ ~
i ,
- , i ,
i 0
1 B , nA ~ ~ ~?ano
u~paMC ~3 ~ t . , ~ , Adi , .
~ .
~2~ ~ r ' ~ ' B9 " 160B (4) , -
~ i p t . ~s . Cs 0,35~
_ ~ 0 3 ' ,
.
~N MOT C
_ i ~jpn p~ QA~ I +
~ By3 4 ~s C ~ 14B ~5) -
i 9 l,1~
_ i 3
i -
- ~
,
~ ~ ' ~B,9B 8~6~
, ~
~ ~
. ~ Y n, ~Q9BBa (6) r
i �
Figure 6.32. Generating equipment feed plate -
_ Key: ~ -
- 1. 250 volts 6. ~6.9 volts, 8 amps ~
2. ~220 volts
3. On the ZIS plate
4. 160 volts
, 5. 24 volts '
_ The third winding is used to obtain a DC voltage of 24 volts with a -
- normal load current of 1.2 amps. This voltage ia insured by the rectifier
BY3 the selenium colum~ of the BM-16A2 tyge and the amoothing f ilter
DpS, C~-C1 , and it is used to feed the signal circuit of four 30-channel
systems. Sn the same winding tk~ere is a lead from which the AC voltage of
24 volts is picked up to feed the hesting elementa of the thermoatats of
the master oscillators. ~
The fourth and fifth windings provide an AC f ilament voltage of 6.3 volts
for the tubes of the basic and reserve modules of generator equipment. -
The load current of each output is 8 amps. A commutator tube L1 is ~
cflnnected in parallel to one of the outputs for a control. From each plate
output the voltage ia fed through breakers located on the ZIS plate to the
55 _
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
corresponding generating equipment modules and to the voltmeter which
_ monitors all of the voltages generated by the electric power supply devices.
Group Equipment Power Pack of the 30-Channel System
= The group equipment power pack is designed to feed group and auxiliary
repeaters of the terminal stations. This pack is located both in the
~ SIG-1M bay and in the SIG-30M bays. The diagram of the module is presented
in Fig 6.33. The module generates 160 volts DC and 6.3 volts AC. `
~ � ~~t ~~t `
. 2 -
r~
sB a~p ~ tp s~ ~Rt By 3 ~~6n~
, ~ C~ Cy O,fA
~21oa S 1 P ~4~
. r.
- I _ 4
3 3 p
I 8 4 +
4 ;~~380;0.~5a ~1~ ~re
~3, .
~--o
~4i -
, ~c~B:i~sa (2) n2 n, . .
_ 13A~ 11.u (3en) (XD) p P~ -
Figure 6.33. Group equipment power pack
Key:
1.~~38 volts, 0.55 amps _
2. ~6.3 volts, 1.75 amps -
3. To the OSL _
- 4. 160 volts, 0.1 amps
The primary winding of the power transformer is fed from the 220 volt AC
- voltage stabilizer. There are three secondary windings. A voltage of
160 volts is picked up from the output of the f irst winding. This voltage ;
is rectified by a silicon diode rectifying bridge, it is filtered by the ;
_ two-section filter Dp~, Dp2, C1, C2, and it is fed to the anode and grid _
circuits of the 6Zh1P tubes. The voltage is regulated by the variab:.e
resistance R2. The load current is 0.1 amps.
The secondary winding of the transformer insures that an AC voltage of
38 volts will be obtained, whi~h is used in cases where the module is ~
installed on the old-model bays (KRR). _
From the output of the third winding 6.3 volts of AC voltage are obtained
- to f eed the filament circuits of the group and auxiliary repeater tubes. _
The load c.urrent is 1.75 amps. The tube L2 is included in parallel to this _
winding to signal normal operation of the module.
56
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
I
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
_ A control relay P is included at the output of the filter. During normal
operation o� the module it operates, receiving power from the rectifier -
through the additional resistance R1~ The contacts 1-2 of the relay P
break the circuit of the signal tube L1, and the contacts 3-4 open the
general bay signa.l circuit.
If there is a failure in the module, for example, in the case of overheat-
- ing of the breaker or in the absence of a rectified voltage, the relay P
trips and its contacts include the corresponding signal.
Individual Equipment Power Pack
~ The individual equipment power pack (Fig 6.34) is designed to f eed the
modulators, the demodulators and the low-frequency amplifiers of the trans- -
ceivers of the 30 channels. The module generates a 15 volt DC voltage
with a normal load current of 0.8 amps. The module includes a tranaformer, -
a rectifying bridge based on silicon diodes and a smoothing filter.
~N
. > -
~7f ~
o- n~ I ~a 3 Q? Q 4 ~+3 ~ -158 ( 2,
qs P � -
ti110B 1 C/ CI C4 CS 14 � -
_ ~ ~3~ 3 A4 2 ,~s
- 4 _
- Z~iBCUZn
= nZ ~
(4)
- , s Knr~ ~lj
Figure 6.34. Individual equipment power pack
Key :
1. To the OSL
2. -15 volts ~
3. �220 volts ~ ~ -
' 4. 24 volt signal -
The signal relay P is connected in para11e1 to the output. During the
normal operation of the module this relay is under current and does not
- offer the possibility of formation of an emergency signal by the circuits.
_ The tube L1 burns on the panel of the module. When the output voltage _
drops, the relay is deenergized and tripped. The circuits of the aignal -
tube L2 are created from the 24 volt voltage fed from the PITGO plate
an the module and the general bay signa~..
Remote Power Transmission Plate
The remote power transmission plate (PDP) containa two identical rectifiera
BY1 and BY2 (Fig 6.35), each of which providea two intermediate repeater
stations witih power.
57 _
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLX
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
~
~
s Q~~75�~ 1 It~ n~.r k t
1 . n,~ ' s~ s`' '~p' r -
. ~ ~ ~
a B~y npt t s TP, ~ 9 C~ CZ R~
d I Byi 1 1 [
3 ~ � n~ P, t, 11
1 J 2
- � r r R
a~T
� ! 6 . 3 ff QI
` ~ B)
~ i 1
~ ~ AA~t 5AP~2 lIA Rr 9p 4s 1 P .
t
l1!r f~ta) ' ~P4
~ r
nA~ ~ s Tpi ~ i B9 ~ R0
S 3 y 2 4 J I 1~ p
_ fl1 ~ ` ~ � ~�r'~ 1 ~ -
~l P:.~e~ ~
~ c ~ a `
~ . . . -
Figure 6.35. Remote power transmission plate '
A voltage of 220 volts from the AC network is f ed through a stabilizer to ~
the primary windings of ~he power transformers Tpl and Tp2. The rectifying
bridges assembled from silicon diodes are connected to the secondary wind-
ings of the transformers. The rect~.fied voltage pulsations are smoothed
by the two-section filters. A control millia~~ter is connected to the
resistors R1 and R2 included at the output of the filters.using the
_ toggle switch B. The resistor~ R5 and R6 are used to regulate the _
voltage of the plate. The maximum remote feed voltage is 270 volts for a
, current of 0.35 amps.
The tubes L1 and L2 signal the presence of an A~ voltage at the plate
input. .
When the remote feed current drops, th~ relay P1(P2) at the plate output
trips, and by its con~act it connects the ballast resistance R3 or R4 -
to the rectifier, it switches on the tube L3(L4) and creates the general
bay signal circuit.
The remote feed voltage is fed from each plate output to the midpoints of
the l~�.ne windings of the line transformers installed on two multiplexed
circuits (Fig 6.36), and it is transmitted over the same pairs as the
high-frequency signals. For prevention of crossover of the group signal _
currents from one circuit to the other through the remote feed devices
the filters D-8 are connected to the midpoints of the transformers. For
high-frequencies of the group signals these filters create a large
resistance and insure the required protection between the circuits.
58 ,
~ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
' FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
~ 1 nrv,
P ~
I T ~
~
~pynna4e~e Q~B 2 ToNanensiu
_ ~3~ cne,rnab~ (4) _ Kayan cnynrednu~l Iial1 ~6~
Q_B x cOA,~u
~5)
~ .
- ~ ,
~
~~pi ~2~ .
Figure 6.36. Connection of remote feed circuits and the
link between operators to the line tranaformers
Key:
1. Line transformer - LTpl
2. Line transformer - LTp2
_ 3. Group spectra
4. D-8
5. Audio-channel of the link between operators
J 6. PDP - remote power tranamission plate
For organization of the low-frequency channel of the link b~tween operators,
the phantom transformer Tp is installed. The capacitor C connected in series
with its winding does~no.t permit closure to the direct current of the
remote feed through the transformer.
For reception of remote feed of the unattended repeater stations in the -
SPU-2D bays remote feed reception plates are installed which are designed
to feed two repeaters. The voltage at the plate output is 160 volts with
a load current of 0.35 amps. This DC voltage is used both to feed the
anode circuits and the filament circuits:~ Inasmuch as the filamenta of
all of the tubes of the two repeaters (a total of 18) are connected in
_ series, the voltage required to feed them is 6.3�18=113.4 volts.
Local Feed Plate of the SPU-2M Bay
The MP local feed plate is installed on the SPU-2M intermediate repeater
bays. The MP plate (~'ig 6.37) is de~igned to feed two repeaters and
operates from the 220 volt AC circuit. On the plate there is a ferro-
resonance stabilizer formed by the choke Dpl, the capacitor C1 and CZ
_ of two microfarads each and the power trar~sformer Tpl. The rectifier is -
assembled from silicon diodes. After the two-section amoothing filer there
is a relay P1, the armature of which is pulled up during normal operation.
- By the contact 31-32 of this relay the repeater ~eed circuit is fora4ed.
The relay P2 fn the feed circuit also operatea. A~ter the reaistox R4 -
the recti�ier voltage of 160, volts is ~ed to the anode circuita of two
_ repeaters. For decoupling these circuita the voltage is fed to one of the
feeders directly from the plate output, and to the other through two half-
sectiona o~ the D-8 filter. '
59
FOR OFFIC~AL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE UNLY
_ .
Avi QDa
i
B ~
p~ Anr R, RI ' P -
~ J-1 ~ B9 y ~j ~y 4 -
nt R,
"110B ~ I Tp .1 ~ it ~t -
, ~ nn ~ ' a~:
ns~:,~ev.~rwoc
. n,~ J~R~ R �~r cu:~:cac.~4~u (2)
~3)
. o
lJ o ~_rr~ 1
A~ il,7~ *
' ~ ~ ~1503~. ( -
r---~ RI ~N~ `4~
14 ~ I o / r~ I r
� ~p i A'B~ s6 ~A_8 ' lc ~
~9 � ~
_ A ~ ~s ~Nt ~~3 ~ 6
~ 3 qd
~ ~ ' o ~
1
Figure 6.37. Local feed plate
Key :
- 1. ~220 volts
2. To the general-bay signal
3. KG3-3
- 4. +160 volts
The filament circuit formed from the series-connected filaments of all
_ 18 tubes of the bay is connected in parallel through the resistors R6 and
R5. The resistor R6 is used to obtain a voltage of 6.3x18=113.4 volts.
The socket I'H1 is used to measure the entire load current, and I'H2, to
~ measure the current in the channel circuit.
There is a signal circuit on the plate. The tube L1 signals the presence
of a network voltage and the state of repair of the protectors Prl and Pr2.
The relay P1 connected in series to the load is under current in the _
operating state of the plate. When the load circuit is bro~en, the r~lay
is released, the light L2 burns and the general bay signal circuit is
- created.
- The plate provides for automatic switching to reserve power and switching
back to the base power. The reserve power can come from the DC battery, _
the positive terminal of which must be connected to the KG3-3 terminal.
When the AC voltage drops, the relay P1 releases, breaking the feed
circuit from the rectifier and including the battery by the contact 51-52.
If the battery voltage differs from 160 volts, the variable resistance R~
~ is used to set Che required amount. On appearance of a voltage at the
output of the rectif ier, automatic switching to this voltage takes place.
In addition to the feed circuits, on the plate there are two phantom
circuit transformers for the link be~ween operators. If there is a
transistorized repeater in the equipment of the link between operators,
it receives power (-24 volts) through the resistor R3.
60
, FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
,~nt� ~ u , i~:
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
- Test Questions
1. What is the purpose and the basic technical speGifications of the
~ KRR-M equipment?
2. Ilow are the channel frequencies distributed in the line spectra of
offices A and B? -
3. Enumerate the composition of the terminal and intermediate station
equipment.
4. What is the purpose of the technical specifications of the individual
equipment?
- 5. Explain the cu_rrent transmission, the purpose of the assemblies and
modules of transmitting and receiving channels of the type A and type B
stations.
6. Explain the purpose, the basic technical specifications of the
intermediate repeate~ s~ation, its equipment composition and the current
transmission of the signal of the upper and lower frequency groups.
7. Explain the purpose of the static relay, its operating principle and
the basic characteristics of the signal channel. _
i 8. Explain the structural diagram of the generating equipment of the
terminal station, the purpose, the technical characteristics and the
operating principle of all modules.
9. Explain the purpose, the composition of the equipment and the operating
principle of the relay assemblies for switching the signal frequency
_ generator, harmonic generator and group carrier repeater.
- 10. Give the equipment composition of the electric power supply devices,
feed voltages used in the equipment and the peculiarities of obtaining them.
11. Explain the purpose, the electrical characteristics and the schematic
of the transceiver module. _
12. Explain the purpose and the frequency characteristic of the D-3,4 -
filter on the transmitter plate.
_ 13. i~splain the phase-difference circuit for suppression of the lower
_ modulation sideband in the channel transmitter.
- 14. Explain the purpose, electrical characteristics and the schematic
peculiarities of the basic~receiver plate assemblies. -
61
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
15. Explain.the purgose, the electrical characteristics and the schematic ~
peculiarities of the structure of the PSU.
16. Give the equipment composition of the group channels of the terminal
and intermediate stations.
17. Explain the purpose, the basic electrical characteristics and the
- structural diagrams of the group and auxiliary repeaters, the group con- ~
_ verters, and the routing filters.
- i-
62
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OPP'ICIAL USE ONLY
CHAPTER 7. KRR-T (KAr~) EQUIPMENT
7.1. General Information
The KRR-M equipment has group, intermediate and generating equipment made -
= from electronic tubes which ie a serious deficiency, lowering ita reliability.
Therefore, in 1968-1910 a completely transistorized analog of the KRR-M
equipment was daveloped the KAMA equipment (the cable equipment multi-
plexing local automatic telephone exchanges) aad the seriea output of this
equipment was started.
The KAMA equipment,.~ust as the KRR equipment, is designed to multiplex the
trunks of the city and suburban telephone exchanges with 30 two-way
telephone channels. The equipment is designed to multiplex symmetric
cable pairs with cordel-styroflex inaulation of the conductors (type
~ I~II~S 7x4x1,2 and 1~II~ 4x4x1,2) and also the single-quad cables with polyethylene
- ineulation (type VTSP 1x4x1,2 or KSPV 1x4x0,9) with respect to the single-
cable, two-band system in the spectrum to S4~ kilohertz. The maximum
communicationa range can reach 80 km with six repeater sections with an
average length of 13 km each. Inasmuch as the eame structural principles
are uaed in KAMA equipment as in the KRR, the procedure for eatablishment
of a subscriber connection over the trunka fc~rmed by the KAMA equipment
channels ie identical with that diacussed earl3er for the KRR equipment.
The diatinction of the KAMA equipment from the KRR equipment is the follow-
, ing. In the ICAMA equipment all of the group, generating and tandem equip-
ment is built using transistora, automatic level control (ALC) and group
channel monitoring devicea which provide for determination of the damaged
route and incluaion af a signal in the case of damage to the channel. In
accordance with the standard requiremente, in the KAMA equipment the fre-
quency of the segregated signal channel hae been changed from 3800 hertz to
_ 3825 hertz; proviaion has been made for the poseibilitq of aynchronizing
the generating equipment by an 8 kilohertz signal tranemitted over the
group channel of any 30-channel system and also from the general-station
master oecillator or the synchronization network. Tn addition, in the
KAMA equipmenf a devi~e has been introduced for organizing the link between
_ operators by a phantom circuit or a high-frequency channel, and the
- 63
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY _
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
r'Ult UFr'1(;lAL US~ UNLY
structural ~lesign o� the equipment of the terminal and intermediate
- stations has been changed.
Inasmuch as the occupied frequency bands and the transmi.ssion levels are
identical in the KAMA equipment and the KRR equipment, joint operation of
the KAMA and KRR equipment on different pairs of the same cable is possible.
However, the introduction of ALC and ~Ch1 [group channel monitoring] and
also changing the signal channel frequency complicates the 3oint operation
of the terminal offices of the KAMA equipment and the KRR-M equipment on
one circuit. This type of inclusion (without ALC and GCM) is permitted
only as an exception where in order to reduce the distortions of the trans- -
mitted number dialing pu~ses in this case it is recommended that a frequency
of 3800 hertz be transmitted over the signal channel of the KAMA equipment -
(from the KRR equipment generator), and a frequency of 3825 hertz over the
signal channel of the KRR equipment (from the generator of the KAMA equip-
ment). -
7.2. Equipment Composition and Structural Peculiarities
The composition of the terminal equipment of the KAMA equipment includes ~
only one type of individual and group equipment bay SIG. The following
are placed in this bay: three static relay modules CP; the line transformer
module LTp; the DK-280 routing f ilter module; the transmission module of
off ice A(at off ice B, the transmission module of office B); the reception _
module of office A(at office B, the reception module of office B); the
D-552 filter module, the PII-8 synchronizing signal transmission module; the
PIT power pack, the ALC and, GCM module of office A(at office B, the ALC
and GCM module of off ice B) and 30 transceiver modules.
The generating equipment of the KAMA equipment is segregated in a separate _
bay the generating equipment bay SGO which provides up to four SIG bays
' (120 channels) with carrier, control and signal frequencies. The SGO bay
= composition includes the following: the phantom transformer module ~Tp
(nonremovable module); two PIT power packs; two ZG master oscillator modules
(at office B, one module); the PY decoupling module, two GG harmoni~
- generator modules; 16 GIN individual carrier frequency generator modules; _
two 296 kilohertz G-296 frequency generator modules; two 304 kilohertz GKCh -
- control frequency generator modules; two 560 kilohertz UGN group carrier
- frequency repeater modules; two GTV (frequency 3825 hertz) ringer oscillator _
modules (in the KRR-M equipment these modules are called G-3,8), the KY -
- monitoring module and two PW-1 and PW-2 speak-buzz key modules.
The equipment installed at the terminal offices also includes the remote
power transmission bay SDP designed for four remote power circuits of
8 3 0-channel groups (with respect to a phantom circuit) and the common
row bay ORS in which the following are placed: the row , signal unit, the
- idle time counters for the system, auxiliary equipment and accessories.
64
_ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02148: CIA-RDP82-00850R040240050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY _
The frames of all types of bays are identical, and they are in the form of
a vertical welded frame 2600x500 mm in size. The modules are placed along
the frame vertically on two sides in a single row on each side. There are�
, no trays in the bay; the modules are inserted in the bay along special
guides serving simultaneously for attachment of the modules and for attach- -
- ment of the cable in the frame. The modules are connected to the frame
_ by 5-pronged ~umpere ~ust as in the KRR equipment. All of the modules are
made in two types of sizea: 98x88x245 mm and 198x$8x245 mm with respect _
to one structural principle. The wiring of the modules is basically printed
circuitry. The dimensions of the bay with the inserted modules (2600x250x240 _
permit placement of 600 channels of KAMA equipment in a single row as
opposed to 480 channels of KRR equipment.
The intermediate KAMA equipment is placed in the intermediate repeating
bay SPU. The SPU is made in the form of a frame with attachments for
fastening four sets of intermediate repeaters. Each of the assemblies
provides for two-way repeating of 30 cha.nnels of ICAMA equipment and it
includes the following: two line transformer modules, two DK-280 filter
modules, the lower group repeatin.g module, the upper group repeating module,
the power pack and ALC module installed in the middle repeating station in
the B-A direction with communications length of more than 50 km.
~
~ For mar_ching the KAMA equipment with the ten-step system or the crossbar
system, the same RSLU relay assemblies are used as for matching the KRR
equipment.
7.3. Construction of Group Channels of the Terminal Offices
Transmission Channel of Office A
The structural diagram of the group channel of office A of the KAMA equip- -
ment is shown in Fig 7.1.
The individual equipment of each office is made up of 30 transceivers
_ (1III). Carrier frequencies that are multiples of 8 kilohertz are fed to the
= IIII converters from the SGO bay. The carrier frequency of each channel,
just as in the KRR equipment is determined by the formula fcarrier-304+8n
kilohertz where n is the channel number, As a result of conversion at
the output of each channel upper modulation sidebands are formed; the
lower sidebands are suppressed by no less than 25 decibels (2.9 nepers),
and the carrier frequency, by no less than 14.8 decibels (1.7 nepers).
_ The outputs of the t:ansmittera of all 30 channels are connected in parallel;
as a result a signal with a spectrum of 312-548 kilohertz is formed at the
- input of the group channel.
The group signal goes from the IIII modules to the D-552 module containing
the D-552 low-frequency filter, the ~umming transformer Tp, the feed
elements RZ, D1 and C1 of the 30 terminal stage~ of the txansmitters and
65
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY _
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED F~R RELEASE: 2007102/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
two attenuators Udll and Ud12 for input of the control frequency of 304 kilo-
hertz to the group channel and the auxiliary frequency of 312 kilohertz.
The D-552 filter limits the frequency of the group signal at the top (a
frequency of 552 kilohertz), suppressing the side conversion products of
the individual channel modulators. ~'he summing transformer 3s used to
combine the output of the 3~ transmitters. The output impedance of the
transmitters equal to 75 ohms is iMSUred by the resistor R3 which is
connected to the secondary winding of the summing transformer. ~
-a~ea6 (2) t4) ~5) (6) (7) (8)
' -SJH -4B,736 -~Jd3
~l~f~,y i H,n,ti,r,~ -S,S3 . -S,~ 'S~6d6 '6d5 ' �I,4J6
o i 3~-~I 9 -~5,f -C,1 -Q95/1,i
~16~Knn`~~ , Y~ ~jr--+u:z;,tOeJ~�r,A ~~r~)~il~,7-8~~~n~rr~13).
u ~ ~ I~~ I~
- I ~p K , ~
- ~ i i ~ yDn. r~~~ ~
! i Q'S5? i i M -?56 4,3~f6 ~ j P-8 j;:-1t!~ ~ -(~9/!6?(7.4 )
! 17 ~ ~r' u~ ~ ~ I I I ~ ~ r-- ~
~ (10) (11) + 5~r~
_ Ne j z Ytla 9do j i I~~ ~ ~ ~ il
~16~ rrsn ~18)~- , r ~ -----------~BKrui ,7-o i i ~Q
~ I-1BB J04x1'q 311~rfq S6 nru I I'' I I;~ 1 5~
BpueM i i Jdn i' i i I l i
~21,~ e+i:mn , l,ld5 6n0/rnpueMa A I I , t I I~8 1~ .
i ~ i ~ 6noK APyu K~T ~i I I i i I I~ i
. i(~ 2~ ~9c ydn i 93n i ~ 8Yc ~ i i I~ ii .
� ~ ~ ~ -SS ~ I /IB RK I ~ a I I h!B I I�~ I
i 1,4d5 ~ 8,7d~ 5~ ~ , I
(16)n~nn ~ ~ i i i~~ i i~. i~i i~ i �
~ l. ______l~_J I oNmp L J~L__/.II.~~J~ ~
I I ~ i. ~ I I '
Pr(!CA' i lIKX 1 I ~ i 1
(26) ? -i,ss -~JS -z~ns -~,~s~isv '
vemn. ~ ' ~ - .~d6 '6Sd5 -6a05 -6Ju6 -67d6 . ~
~ hTT~ ~ -
~ i I 1 C/ltNO/1U1A4[~p~
-6.5 i 6ilOxllp~Jxp ,r7npA0Q / ~
IfPTp rvemvuKU npacmo~s ~29 ~
J4 -S6,Sd6 ~
-I?d6 (27 ) (28) . .
- Figure 7.1. Structural diagram of the SIG-A off9.ce
_ Key: ~
- 1. GEN 16. To the IIII
2. -47.8 decibels, -5.5 nepers 17. Transmitter
3. Control I$� fcarrier
4. -48.2 decibels, -5.55 nepers 19. Udll attenuator ~
5. -43 decibe~s, -S.0 nepers 20. Udl2 attenuator
- 6. -5.6 decibels, -0.65 nepers 21. Odd receiver
7. -6 decibels, -0.7 nepers 22. 1.7 decibel attenuator -
8. -7.4 d?cibels, -0.85/75 nepers 23. A reception module
9. A transmission module 24. ALC and GCM module
_10. Udl. 4.3 decibel attenuator 25. 8.7 decibel attenuator
- 11. GUs group repeater 26. Even re~ceiver ~
12. PII-8 mod,zl.e 27. -12 decibels
13. DK-200 mod,ule 28. -56.5 decibels
14. -7.8 decil~els 29. Signal unit, channel blocking, _
15. Line idle time counters
_ '
1-
66
FOR OFFICIAL~ USE ONLY
~I
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
,
. FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
- The "Gen" and the "Control" m~suring socketa are used without disconnect-
ing the modulea. The measuring generator can be connected to the "Gen"
socketa, and the selective level indicator can be connected to the "Control" -
. socketa�(by ~he high-resistance'inptct) to measure the output levele of the -
transmitters and the control and auxiliary frequency levela.
The termina.l stages of the txansmitters are fed from the parametric voltage
stabilizer.consistin~ of the ballast resistor RZ and stabilitron D1. The
stabilize voltage is equal to 9 volta. In order to avoid the appearance of -
crosaovers with respect to the feed circuit, the etabilitron is further �
, shunted by a capacitor C1. ,
. TY:e mea.suring level of the transrriitters and the input of the D-552 filter =
. is -47.8 decibels (-5.5 nep~era) on a 75 ohm load.
_ For automatic gain control of the groug channel, a control frequency of
_ 304 k.ilohertz is fed to the input of the D-552 filter through the Udll _
attenuator. In order not to load~the channel; this frequency is fed to
its input with a level 8.7 decibels (1 neper) belo~,r the measuring frequency. ~i
In orcl~r to find the damaged line of the group channel, the 312 kilohertz ~
auxilia.ry frequency is used. It is fed to the Ud12 attenuator and if the
group channel is in good working~order it is not transmitted to the line. _
- Thus; cansidering the control frequencies, the group equipment in.the A-B -
directian must provide for transmission of the signals with a spectrum of
304-548 kilohertz.
From the output of the D-552 filter the group signal goes to the A trans- `
mission module conta~nin~ the series-incl~uded gro.up modulator M, the
D-256 filtEr, the 4.3~decibel (0.5 neper) attenuator and the GUa group ~
repeater. The input 1eve1 of .the module is -48.2 decibels (-5.55 nepers),
the output level is -5.6~decibels ~(-0.65 nepers) on a load of 75 otuns.
� The group modulator is executed from transistors, and it introduces a ~
- gain of 4.3-6.1 decibels (0.5-0.7 nepers). As a result of group conver-
sion on a frequency of 560 kilohertz, the group signal of 304-548 kilohertz
_ is converted to a spectrum of 12-256 kilohertz. In order to suppress the .
- undesirab.le upper frequency sideband the D=256 filter is included after the
modulator,~ The r_onverted signal is amplif~ied by the GUs group repeater.
The amplification of the repeater is 43 decibels (5.0 nepers); the regula-
tion limits are +2.6 decibels (0..3 nepers). In.order to reduce the excess
~ gain, a 4.3 decibel (0.5 neper) attenuator~i~ included at the input of the
repeater. ~ ~
- From thz group repeater output the signal goea to the band-elimination
~ (rej ector) filter P-8 u~hich has maximum damping on a frequency of 8 kilohertz.
The P-8 filter operates as a pair with the II-8 filter designed for trana-
mission of a synchronizing frequency o~ 8 kilohertz to the line to the
_ opposite terminal office. :
67 -
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL U5~ UNLY
The the signal goes to the DK-280 module. The fork of the DK--280 filters _
provides f or the necessary protection between the transmission and recep-
tion channels of the terminal off ice [no less than 65 decib~is (7.5 nepers)].
From the output ai the D-280 f3lter the signal goes to the line transformer ~
module. The line transformer is used to form a balanced (symmetric) line
input circuit of tiie equipment and is ~iesigned for inclusion between loads
of 75 ohms (on the office side) and 160 ohms (on the line side). The line
winding of the transformer has midpoint lead-out for organizing the link
between operators over phantom circuits and for remote feed of the repeaters _
_ of the intermediate repeater stations. In order to decrease the effect
- between the systems the D-8 filter is connected tl-irougli the remote feed
circuit to the midpoint of the line transformer. A 12-256 kilohertz group
- signal goes through the line transformer to the line with a level of ~ _
-7.8 decibels (-0.9 nepers) on a load of 160 ohms.
" Reception Channel of Office A -
The reception channel must provide for amplification of the group signal ~
with respect to 304-543 kilohertz and covering of the line attenuation to
60 decibels (6.9 nepers), which corresponds to attenuation of the line of -
maximum length (14.3 km) on a frequency of 548 kilohertz.. If we consider
that the transmission level of off ice B to the line is equal to -3 decibels
(-0.35 nepers), the minimum reception level of the input of the line trans-
= former of office A will be -62 decibels (-7.25 nep.ers). The signal level =
at the output of the group channel at the point of connection of th~ channel
receivers is taken equal to -12.2 decibels (-1.4 nepers) on a load of
75 ohms. ~ �
The group signal at 304-548 kil.ohertz goes through the line transformer -
and the K-280 filter to the main equalizer MB. This equalizer is used to ,
- correct the residual errors of the line equalizers installed on the inter-
= mediate repeaters and also ~he di~tortions introduced by the office equip- ;
ment included at the terminal off ice. The MB attenuation is about 1.7 deci- ~
_ bel.s (0. 2 nepers) . ~
~
From the MB output the group signa.l goes to the A reception module made up ;
of the auxiliary repeater Ws at 304-548 kilohertz, the 3.5 decibel (0.4 i
. neper) attenuator, the GUs group repeater in the 1.7 decibel (0.2 neper)
attenuator. The auxiliary upper group repeater VtTs at 304-548 kilohertz ~
is used for preamplification o~ the group signal. The average gain of the ~ ~
Ws is equal to 19 decibels (2.2 nepers), and by using the ALC circuits it
can be regulated within the limits~of +7 decibels (0.8 nepers). The ~
_ VK-280 equalizing circuit corrects;the frequency characteristic of the
two K-280 filters, one of which is in the office B transmission channel. ~
~
The line equalizer LV compensates for the amplitude-frequency distortions '
introduced by the preceding section of cable. The accuracy of the
correction is +0.9 decibels (0.1 nepers,), and it is rea.ched by means of
two ne~removable variable equalizers, the resolderings in the circuit of
_
68 -
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY <
~ . 5.~N1~_ i.AJ`! a..u,_.~r... 1'1'/
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY ~
which permit correction by stepa of 1.7 decibela each (0.2 nepers). The
Udl-8.7 decibel attenuator permita planar gain control of the channel in
_ steps every 4.3 decibels (0.5 nepera).
- The variable attenuatoxs,VK-280, Lv are atructurally combined and together
with the ALC device~ are pl.aced in the single ALC module.
- From the output of the Udl-8.7 decibel attenuator the group signal goes
, to the D-552 f ilter deaigned to auppresa the radio signals induced in the
_ line. In order to obtain the required level diagram between the D-552
filter and the group repeater, a 3.5 decibel (0.4 neper) attenuator is -
included.
The group repeater amplifies the signal by 43 decibels (5.0 nepers).
- Channel receivers are cornected to the output of the repeater. In order to
increase the protection from the croastalk between even and odd channels the _
GUs has two ou*_puts: even and odd channels. The odd channel receivers are -
- connected through the 1.7 decibel (0.2 neper) attenuator; the even channel
receives are connected through the DS differential system which decouples -
_ the ALC devices and the individual cnannel receivers.
In order to monitor the receptior.. level of any channel at the output of the ~
group channel the "control" plug is provided. The control ia exercised by
- means of a selective level indicator connected by the h~.gh-resistancz input.
The AL~ is rea.lized by the PKK monitor channel receiver connPCted in parallel
to the output of the group reception repeater. With variation of the
_ level of the control frequency of ~he 304 kilohertz at the output of the
_ GUs the receiver generates the corresponding signal to the regulating ele- ~
~ent located in the feedback circuit of the auxiliary repeater. As a result, _
the gain of the Ws varies to restoration of the normal reception level -
at the output of the group repeater.
. For monitoring the group channel, finding the damaged line, signalling and
blocking the channels, the receivers of the group channel control KGT1
y [GCM1] and KGT2 [GCM2] are used. -
- Office B Transmission Channel
The structural diagram of the group channel of office B is shown in
Fig 7. 2. '
- The transmission channel is used for amplif ication and transmission of the
group signal to the line with a epectruta of 304-548 kilohertz. In the B-A
_ direction the group signal is not converted; therefore the B tranamission
- module contains only the group repeater GUs with the average gain of ~
43 decibels (5.0 nepers). The D-552 f ilter module, the DK-280 module and
- the line transformer module exPCUte the same functions as at office A.
69
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
,
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
The group signal measuring levels at the various points of the transmission
~ channel are indicated in the diagram. At the GUs output the transmission
level, just as in the KRR equipment is -2.2 decibels (-0.25 nepers) on a
75 ohm load; the signal goes to the line with a level of -3 decibels (-0.35
nepers) on a 160 ohm load.
~4zae418) ~ _
�Jd5 �Z,ffdb (15)-tia.~~5(~6~S,f
Z~d6 -S,SS ON ~L ~e.h 17~
~1~-Q35/160 -QJ.~13 (12~-u,75 ' i f
i I i I ~ t
~ ~~rqKla~i~3~ ~6n~c~r~~1~~ ~ . 6~QtS51~ x~n~20) '
~ ~ x1B0 j ' i~ i j'S5 ~ j ' ~
i i 1 I a r~'~~ 1~ ~
_ i `
~~6 ~Tii ~ ~---~JD ~~rui ~I~ iR~~~Jr.xb'1,+1-;?C6i ~23~ I
r--�--- ~
r J ~
r_~,,Y vl
i ii S.~.Pn-B ~~0) i. ~ )
~ I I~ ~-53d6 3yL6 l7x~.~~ y0n? Q~ ~i -
- (5~ ~ i I i r ~i n-B Bxry t-s,~ (1 ~g ~28'~ 27) ydr.; : Y~"
!I �8~ i j~ jir--- l.?:t
ji~ _ j j j~ ~9~ jll ~ j_r6/IOKAP9u A'Pl I~ p~e Q6 4~
I ~5 Lb ~
_ J i BYc ' 9~~n.. I i 9,~;~. r ~y~ +
i 1~? ~I P-B MB I I~ h~' ~B 4,1J6 i qM ~s ~J~i6 ~ 3~ ~
~ ~---~~L-------J ~ n I~ c7( f,- i i
~
I Kx1
-S,6/l60 -5.6/13~ Cutyanu euua, ^ KPT i ~4S -1,4; 1?c'SJ - � , ~
_ -41d5 -,fpd6 6n~xupndKa,,r~ 6) i ~ ( ~ -
Na~aQ cvemva- -J9,~61 ~ J a�;m~.
(6) ~7) ~8~oea xrr1-----~ ;
~
1
Figure 7.2. Structural diagram of the SIG-B station
_ Key:
1. -3 decibels 20. To the IIII ~
2. -2.6 decibels 21. Transmitter
~ 3. DK-280 module 22� fcarr er _
4. LT module 23. -1.4 ~(-12 decibels) _
_ 5. Line 24. Odd receiver
6. -47 decibels 25. ~.7 decibel attenuator Udl.
7. -50 decibels -
- 8. Signal, channel blocking, idle time counter _
9 . 8 ~ kiloher tz
10. PII-8 module 26. B reception module
11. -53 decibels 27. Ud12 attenuator ~
12. -2.2 decibels 28. 312 kilohertz
- 13. B transmission module 29. Ud].1 attenuator
14. GUs 30. 304 kilohertz
- 15. -48.2 decibels 31. GUs group repeater =
16. Control 32. Udl 13 decibel attenuator _
- 17. Gen 33. 560 kilohertz �
18. -47.8 decibels 34. Udl 4.3 decibel attenuator
19. D-552 module 35. Control
36. KGT1 = GCM1
37. KGT2 = GCMZ
70
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
i
FOR OFFI~;IAL USE ONLY
r
Office B Reception Channel
The reception channel ia used to receive the group signal with a apectrum
of 12-256 kilohertz, conversion of it to thE 304-548 kilohertz apectrum
and amplification to a level 0~�-12 decibels (-1.4 nepera) required for
- normal operation of the ind`ividual cha.nnel receivers. The minimum level
of channel reception on a frequency of 248 kilohertz is -49 decibela
(-5.5 nepers) on a 160 ohm load.
The group signal goes through th~ liae traneformex and D-280 f ilter to the
PII-8 filter�moSule. The re~ ector filter ~-8 which has a maximum attenuation
on a frequency of 8 kilohertz d~~e :~ui transmit the synchronizing frequency -
to the group channel. This frequency, which comes from the office A ia
separated by the II-8 band filter and goes to the generating equipment of
office B. From the output of the.re~ector filter the group signal at
12-256 kilohertz goes through the main equalizer MB to the office B reception
module. xhis module is made up of the auxiliary repe-ter Ws on 12-256
kilohertz, the demodulator DM, the D-548 filter, the Udl-13 decibel (1.5
neper) attenuator and the GUs group repeater.
- The Ws introduces an average gain of 19 decibels (2.2 nepers) and it
- ~ provides for automa.tic gain control within the limits of +7 decibels
(�0.8 nepers).
The VD-280 filter equalizer compensates for nonuniformity of the frequency
characteristic of the two D-2$0 filters, one of which is located at off ice A.
The LV line equalizer and the step attenuator compensate for the frequency-
amplitude distortions introduced by the preceding section of MKS cable. -
Just as at office A, the correction is made by two variable equalizers per- -
mitting the ma.gnitude to be altered by reaoldering in steps every 1.7 deci- r
bels (0.2 nepers). The VD-280, LV and the variable attenuator are
_ structurally combined with the ALC and they are placec~~ in a aingle ALC
module.
The group signal at 12-256 kilohertz goes to the input of the demodulator -
with a level of -39 decibels (~-4.5 nepera). The D-548 filter is connected
. at the demodulator output. It transmita only the difference products of _
conversion, that is, frequencies of 304-548 kilohertz. In order to obtain
the required level diagram, the 13 decibel (1.5 neper) attenuator ia ~
= included between the filter and the GUs.
The DS diff erential system at the output of the GUs, the 1.7 decibel
attenuator and also the ALG and GCM devices perform the same functiona
as at off ice A. ~
7.4. Intermediate Repeater Stations -
With a trunk length of more than 13-14 km the terminal officea usually
- cannot compensate for attenuation of the section of cable. In order to
71
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
increase the operating ring through the equipment, semiconductor inter-
mediate repeater stations PUT are used.
The structural diagram of the PUT of the It~ equipment appears in Fig 7.3.
-a9oa �IJdb ~6, -S.odG ~ (Z6~
-~9~~ -s,~67s - ~~s ryc -v6s
f ~1~ -S,6/~SO �i6D 9Jn~ /16 D 18) -o,~l.'s.. -
(2) ' m~i 7
` I nKXI 8 ~ �61AG -64J6 -EJ. ~
I Z^ -iS~6 -7,7 -135 �1,J/IS
I � , ~~5, r9c (9 :SS Blr i ~ , , -
-Jd6 ?SO ~ Q /1B 90~1 Q -7'S
I (3,) -a,rs 3, s2os ~
q~~ 4~ ~FIP .Q l!D KJ ~~p ~~B
a~d fne~~a ~i Q~ ~ ~ie~ a '
~ I Cp. ~OAJU ~t ~ R~ ~ f ~ C~ cOFJ(t I ~ -
,2�B
r,
, 6 Q-D x1 + .
_ (5) nrP 1~n i~_ an ,~a~, ~B ~ aa 1s (17 ~
~1 ~ ,~r~;
- ( n~K, (~2)
~ ~ syc ~ t~
, x1ea Q ns 9dns Q r-zao ~ ~
Figure 7.3. Structural diagram of an intermediate repeater
- station
Key: -
1. -4.9 decibels 14. LV line equalizer _
2. LTpl line transformer 15. Ws
3. -3 decibels 16. -5.6 decibels -
4. -2.6 decibels i7. LTp4 line transformer
5. LTP3 line transformer 18. LTP2 line transformer -
6. -51 decibels
7. VD-280
8. PKK2
9. GUs
10. ~Tp phantom transformer -
11. Plugs for the link between ,
_ operators
12. GUs
13. Ud13 attenuator
The PUT contains the set of equipment which is used for two-way repeating -
of 30 channels. All of the PUT equipment is made up of modules analogous
to the corresponding modules of the SIG terminal office of the KRR-M
equipment and having the same purpose. -
In the A-B direction the PUT covers the attenuation of 41 decibels (4.7
nepers). The minimum reception level at the input of the line transformer
LTpl is -49 decibels (-5.6 nepers). The signal�goes to the lower group
amplification channel through the D-280 filter. The equal~~~~ar VD-280 _
72 .
J
FO% OFF'IC~AL USE- ONLY ~
_
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
compensates for diatortions introduced by thia filter. The correction
of the distortione introduced by t~.e preceding aection of cable ia �
. accomplished by the variable attenuator Udl~ and the variable line
= equalizer LV. Then the aignal is fed to the input of the group repeater
- GUs and it ie amplified to the 1eve1 of -5.6 decibels (0.65 nepera). The
amplified signal goea through the D-280 filter and the LTP2 line trans-
former to tlie line with a lev~l of -7.8 decibels ~-0.9 nepers).
In the B-A direction the repeating covera attenuation o:E 60 decibele
- (6.9 nepers). T.he minimal level at the LTp2 input will be -63 decibela
_ (-7.25 nepers). The 304-548 kilohertz signal go~s to the amplification
channel of the upper frequ~ncy g,roup ttnrough the line transformer and the
K-280 filter. The VK-280 equalizer precompensates the distortions intro-
duced by the K-280 filter, and then the aignal is amplified by the auxiliary
repeater Ws at 304-548 kilohertz. The variable attenuator Ud12 and variable
equalizer LV correct the frequency-amplitude distortions introduced by the
preceding section of cable,~after which the corrected signal is fed to the. _
input of the group i-epeater GUa by which it is amplified to a level of
-2.2 decibels (-0.25 nepers). Through the K-280 filter and the LTpl line
tranaformer the group signal is fed to the line with a level of -3 decibels
{-0.35 nepers).
_ With a communications length of more than 50 1~ at the middle repeater
station in the amplification channel of the upper frequency group a control
= channel receiver PKK2 is installed which realizes automatic gain control _
of the channel. The introduction of ALC in the B-A direction is explained
by an inadmissible increase in noise level in the equipment channels on
- tha long lines as a result of seasonal shift of the level diagram. Just
as at the terminal off ice the PKK [control channel receiver] contr~la the
gain of thE auxiliary repea.ter in the case of variation in level of the
control frequency of 304 kilohertz at the GUs ou~put. The possible limits
- of variation of the repeater gain are +7 decibels L+0.8 nepers) from the
average gain of 19 decibels (2.2 nepers). '
The second set of PUT equipment included between the line transformers LTp~
and LTP4 operates analogously, insuring two-way repeating of the aecond
30-channel group. -
The repeaters of both assemblies permit remote feed from a DC power supply
installed at the terminal office. The feed voltage of the repeater and
- PKK is received from individual ~tabilitrons D1-D3 (upper repeater) and
- D4-D6 (lower repeater) included in diff erent conductora of the phantom
circuit. The C1-C4 capacitors and the halfsections of the low-frequency
� f iltere Dp, C are the decoupling elements of the feed circuits.
7,5. Operating Principles of the ALC [auComatic level control) and GCM
[group channel monitor] of the KAME1 Equipment
In order to improve the quality indexes of the channels and facilitate
operation in the KAMA equipment proviaion ia made for the instailation of ~
73
~ FOR QFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- FOR UFFICIAL USE UNLY
automatic level control (ALC) and a group channel monitor (GCM). In the
equipment a frequency-dependent electric system for the ALC on one control
_ frequc~ncy of 304 kilohertz is used. P'or the auxil-tary circuits in the AI.C
and the GCM frequencies of 312 and 296 kilohertz are used.
Fig 7.4 shows the structural diagram explaining the operating principle of
_ the ALC and the GCM of the KAMA equipment.
- From the control frequency generators PKCh installed at the terminal off ices,
the control frequency of 304 kilohertz goes through the asymmetric attenua-
tor Udll in the D-552 filter module to the input of the group channel
with a level 8.7 decibels (1 neper) below the measuring level. At the
terminal offices, and with a communications length of more than 50 km and
in the amplification channel of the upper frequency group of the middle
intermediate repeater, the.control frequency signal is isolated by the
' control cha~el receiver (PKK). At the terminal offices the PKK is connected
to the output of the group channel.
Let us consider the operation of the PKK in the example of the office A
for which the structural diagram of the receiver is shown in expanded form. -
At office B the receiver operates analogously. From the even channel output
of the GUs the control frequency 304 kilohertz goes to the differential , -
. system, DS of the control channel receiver PKK1 with a level of -21 decibels
(-2.4 nepers). This frequency goes through the P-304 band filter to the
- modulator M with the carrier frequency 296 kilohertz. The difference
conversion product gives a frequency of 8 kilohertz which goes through the
II-8 band f ilter to the UKChl repeater. The amplified control frequency is
fed to the regulating device PY1. Here it is rectif ied and compared with
the ref erence (st.andard) voltage. The result of the comparison is amplified
by the DC amplifier and goes to the regulating element RE which controls
the amplif ication of the auxiliary repea.ter.
A thermistor (thermal resistance type T8M), the resistance of which varies -
depending on the magnitude of the current flowing through it, is used as
the regulating element. The thermistor is included in the negative feed-
back circuit of the Ws and shunts the frequency-dependent two-terminal
network with respect to alternating current, varying the gain of the
repeater. Thus, if the control frequency level at the output of the GUs
decreases, in the PY1 the difference between the reference voltage and
the control signal voltage will lead to the fact that the current through
the thermistor increases, and its resistance decieases. The shunting _
eff ect of the thermistor becomes stronger, the depth of negative feedback _
diminishes and the gain of the VLTs increases. The noxmal control frequency -
level is restored at the output of the GUs. With an increase in control
signal level at the output of the GUs the voltage di�ference of the _
- control and reference signals leads to a decrease in current through the
thermistor and an increase in its resistance. The depth of negative feed- _
~ back of Ws increases, and i.ts gain diminishes.
74
FOR U.~F,ZG~AL .uS~E. ,ONL,X .
' '
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
a~
~ ~ ~-1 M U1 N
~ O tMl l+l r w . w ~
N tA ~ ~
v v v~ v ~ M O .C d N
C ?Z e v .QO ~ ~ U la M
. 0 ~L~' L 4.``N ~ c ~cV ` ~ ~i �w ~ ~ .C I
o ~ i c~ ~ ~e o., ~n ~ ti ~ r~
~ ~ ~ ti~CM � i ~ a
~ ~a
N ~d~v ~N.1 Op) ed r-~N j ~
b Y ~ 7 ti~ c 1 V~~` ~ O~ ro ~p.~wM M
c~'a ^ O H ~'~l ~ ~ ~D . b v C9 ~-1 ~ 'r~' ~ P4 . w
~ r~-I ~ a ~ L ~ ~ ~11 M �r~ ~..r . w ~
v
~v ~N ~ . a I H ~ yP+
c, N ~
' p~ v ~v V N4..-'r-! Q~iN.O (
~
� t~ 2 t t~ ~ ~ ~
~ ~ y OA4 M
~ ~1' O ~ N ~ C7
N~ r-------~~~.~~ .w I I W I cJ
~ w N I 1 ~ W I'~I
p C 2� a v{ " V (~~J O GI ~ r-1 ~ M~
v
ac ~ w ^ ~
~v ~ N 0 0 1 ~'r ` q ~oo i pp rO.{ ~'J a N PG _
~ r~
^ ^
V t ~ vLi - ~ ~ I ~ .~4
~ N ~ ~ y ~ ~ b N I 00 N cJ c~~1
~ N u1t 0 CV 1~ O C! I 2''~ ~
~.y ~ aV v v ~ ~ N ( rl ~D H d0 i~ 4-I fd
~ ~ v bv'o~~? : cd ~1 ~t C~ 4-1 ~ C!
- .v v ~ ~ 2 t~ ~o w i o ~ ~
`i g b ~.~i j~ rl q~
- e . O a ~ M ~ N Nc~ N ~ ~ ~J -
~ ~o G!
~ ~
-----N - cii ~ 00 .c I~ O ~ I _
~N ~ ~ ~ ~ . ~ ~ ~ N H ~ a.?
, ~ i~ Z l L~ ~~0 ~ w 1~+ cn ~ A I M r-1
^ ~ ~ I' a' I N ~ `O ~ � o p~'~-~ ; �i ~ -
~ ; ' v ` - -
S 4 ~ ~a ~ ~ r-I ~M--I N a N. ~ b QO
L t ~~C 0 ~ ~ .~G ~ I N �NO ~ -
~ h L m 0 ~ ~a n~ 4
I
v~ 4 ~e { Gl c*1 u 00 O a I O
` ~ ,o ~,a L1 i ~ ~ r. H N I ~ I I ~
~ M ~1
Q y a ~ L~- ~ ~ I~ N ~ ~ Q4 i~ ~ a0 ~ r1 `
1~ O(A N� w Q1
~ " ~ O� ~I C~ ~ v n N�w ~ ~ y ew JJ C+
C
~ ra ~ I 1~'V ~ 'w q 1'd n f"~ ~
a ~ ~''1 ` I � v' ~ ~ rul rN-I N r~l M.~ C1
y/'~ Ov0 a.~ Q) jJ a7 w
~
~ v v ~`v C ~w ~ ~ N ~ ~ u~ ~
E r�~ ~O~ ~x Z ~ C~;~�.~ o~ufsab qH~ ~ _
o~ v H~4 P~ p f"~ ~~1 fA
� ~ i~ C7 I
- v v~ v ~ ~ I I I I I 1
- e-I 1~ r-i 1~ N 00
' r{ ~O r~ r-I N N M N1
d
~i
75 . -
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
On variation of the level of the control frequency at the input of Ws by
+7 decibels (0.8 nepersj the ALC maintains the control frequency level at
the GUs output with an accuracy of �0.43 decibels (0.05 nepers), leaving
the reception level of the 30 channels unchanged.
The ALC system is made not planar, but frequency-dependent, inasmuch asz
the line losses depend on the channel frequency (number). For this purpose
the feedback circuit of the W s includes frequency-dependent two-terminal
networks and the signals of frequency having greater attenuation are
amplified more, and those having less attenuation are amplified less.
The ALC devices in the intermediate repeater station operate analogously.
- From the output of the upper group GUs the control frequency is separated
by the PF-304 band f ilter of the control channel receiver PKK2 and the ,
amplif ied frequency goes to the input of the regulating device PY2. Here
the AC voltage is rectif ied and compared with the reference voltage, and the
difference amplif ied by the DC amplif ier is f ed to the thermistor included -
in the negative f eedback circuit of the VUs. Just as at the terminal
office, the accuracy of maintaining the rated level of the control frequency
at the output of the GUs of the intermediate station will be +0.43 decibels _
_ with variation of the control frequency level at the input of the VUs by
+7 decibels. -
At the intermediate stations where the ALC is not installed, a resistor is
included in the negative f eedback circuit of the Ws instead of the
thermistor for which the gain of the amplif ier is equal to a mean value of
- 19 decibels (2.2 nepers).
A control frequency of 304 kilohertz is also used to monitor the group
channel. The control is realized by the KGT1 [GCM1] receiver connected to
the output of the UKChl of the control channel receiver PKK1. In the
presence of a 304 kilohertz frequency at the output of the UKChl the
GCM1 receiver operates and by the 1-2 contact its relay connects the =
thermistor of the regulating element RE to the feedback circuit of the Ws. ,
By the contacts 4-5, the Ud12 attenuator is shunted through which the ~
~ auxiliary frequency of 312 kilohertz is fed to the group channel, and the i
contacts 7-9, 4- 6 and 10-12 break the si~nal, RSLU relay blocking and system _
idle time counter circuits.
I-
_ When the control frequency level drops or is reduced by more than 3.5 deci-
bels (0.4 nepers) at at the GCM1 input the receiver relay releases,
= switching its contacts. As a result the resistor R1 which limits the
current through the RE is connected in series to the thermistor, and the
R2C circuit which shunts the thermistor with respect to alternating current
is connected parallel to it. The resistancesof the resistor are selected
so that an av~rage gain of the VUs equal to 19 decibels (2.2 nepers) will
be established on all frequencies of the band. The contacts of the -
- released relay also close the local (the L1 light lights up), row and
general office signal (OS) circuits, the RSLU assembly circuits (BL), the
= system idle time counters (UP), and the circuit shunting the Ud12
attenuator is opened.
76
FOR OFFICIAL_IISE ONLY._., .
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
- The auxiliary frequency signal at 312 kilohertz goea to the group channel
with a level equal to the measuring level. At the oppoa~te terminal
station this signal goes from the output of the GUs to the diff erential
_ system of the PKK1, and from the diff erential system filtered by the PF-312
filter, to the input of the GCM2 receiver. The GCM2 responds and by the
contacts of its relay includes the local (the L2 lighta up), common row
and general station signal, it blocks the channels and includes the system
_ id~e time counters of the opposfte terminal office.
Af ter r.ecovery of the group chanr~el at ?`.:~P GCM, intu~ a signal appears
- with a control frequency of 304 kilohertz, andithe receiver relay again
responds, disconnecting the thermistor shunt, the signal, the blocking,
- the counters and shunting the Ud12 attenuator. The frequency of 312 kilo-
hertz ceases to go to the line, and the GCM2 receiver relay of the opposite
- terminal off ice releases, disconnectin~ the signal, blocking and counters.
The operating condition is restored.
Thus, by lighting the local signal lights the GCM1 and GCM2 permit
determination of the nature of the damage to the group channel. Thus, if
the light L1 is lit, then the incoming group channel is damaged; if L2,
the outgoing channel; if the lights Ll are lit at both terminal off ices,
then the group channel is damaged in both directions.
At the intermediate station the control of the operating condition of the
group channel is exercised by the GCM3 receiver connected to the UKCh2
output. In the presence of a 304 kilohertz frequency the servorelay of
the receiver operates, connecting the thermistor to the feedback circuit
af the auxiliary attenuator by its contacts. In the case of damage to the
group channel or a reduction in level of the control frequency at the input
of the GCMg by more than 3.5 decibels (0.4 nepers) the receiver relay
releases. The shunts of the thermistor are connecCed, and the gain of the
Ws is fixed in the middle positjon. The free relay contacts of the GCM3
can be used for local (ma.nned PUT) or remote (unattended PUT) signalling.
7.6. Group Repeaters of the KAMA Equipment
- In the group channel of the KAMA equipment, an auxiliary repeater for the
lower frequency group (Ws 12-256), an auxiliary repeater for the upper
frequency group (Ws 304-548) and a group repeater, a single one for both
frequency groups (GUs 12-548) are used. The Ws 12-256 is used only at
- the SIG-B terminal office; the remaining repeaters are uaed both at the
terminal and at the intermediate stations. The repeaters of the KAMA
- equipment are made from transistors and are designed for inclusion between
load resistances of 75 ohms. An 18 volt DC power supply is used to power
the repeaters.
Fig 7.5 shows the schematic diagram of the auxiliary repeater of the upper
frequency group. The repeater is designed for preamplification at the
304-548 kilohertz group signal, and it is a two-atage tranaistorized
77
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
repeater with direct coupling with respect to direct current between the
stages. Both stages of the amplifier are made from the P416 type
trans istors included above the circuit with common emitter (OE). In
- order to improve the signal/noise ratio at the input of the amplifier,
the input circuit of the V[1s is made in accordance with the transformer
diff erential circuit (Tpl, R2) insuring the requi:red input impedance of
75 ohms without using a shunt. The output impedance of the repeater (75
ohms) is determined by the shunt resistance R8 and transformer Tp2.
, R~
-f
~Or
R6 R9 G~ I~1 9a~ C'
~l~lp~ . r~ ~1 R~ ~2~
~ ~ I � R Ry C. � /
i
4~ Rt gf C~ ~6 RrD
C ~
- t
_ Rf Tp~ , ~
~ , ( R~=
C~ C~
Figure 7.5. 304-548 kilohertz auxiliary repeater Ws .
Key:
1. Input
2. Output
The f irst stage of the repeater is encompassed by local (resistor R3)
negative feedback and the entire amplifier is encompassed by general
(the circuit R5, C1) negative f eedback with respect to direct and alternating
curr ent. The correcting two-terminal network R10, C5, C6, Tp3, and R12
insuring the required frequency-dependent variation of the gain of the ,
= Ws on variation of~the resistance of the thermistor R12, is included in
- the f eedback circuit of the second stage. The transformer Tpg matches '
the resistances of the thermistor with the correcting two-terminal network. ~
- The operating conditions of the transistors are basically determined by the ~
resistors R2, R4, R5, R6, R9. .The capacitors C2 and C4 are blocking, ~
- and C~ and Cg decouple the circuits of the Ws and the ALC with respect ,
to direct current. In the f eed circuit provision is made for a decoupling
f ilt er R~, C3. The average gain of the repeater with a thermistor
r esistance of 600 ohms is 19 decibels (2.2 nepers). ,
The auxiliary repeater of the lower group Ws 12-256 is designed for pre-
amplification of the ~roup signal of the lower frequency group. The
circuitry of this repeater is anal~gous to the circuitry of the repeater
Ws 304-548, and it differs from the latter only by the correcting two- '
terminal network in the �eedback circuit of the second stage of the
repeater which defines the frequency characteristic of the gain of the
repeater on variation of the thermistor resistance. The average gain of
.
FOR OFFICIAL- iFS~ ONLY- - ~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED F~R RELEASE: 2007102/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
the VUs 12-256 with a thermistor resistanc~ of 60G ohms is also equal
to 19 decibels (2.2 nepers).
Fig 7.6 shows the schewatic diagram of the group repeater GUa 12-548.
The repeater is designed for the basic amplification of ~he group aignal -
in the upner or lower frequency group band, and it is a four-stage transistor-
ized repeater with combined coupling between the stages. In the firat two
stagea of the repeater made from the transistors T1 and T2 type P416A, _
direct DC coupling is used between the sCages. The connection between the
third (T3 type P416A) and fourth (T4 tpge P609) stages is executed analogously.
The coup~ing between the second and third stages is rheostat-capacitive -
(capacitor C~~. The application of combined coupling between the stages
permits improvement of the phase characteristics of the multistage
- transistorized repeater and excludes the possibility of self-excitation of
it.
R' R~0 -E
T ~ -
C,r~ S~s ~8 r a~ 2~jp '
Rr Rt C Rp ' .
~
_ rp1 C? rt Ta R~S ~
~ ,i~~ r~ ra ~
_ ~ ~ R R Rir Ru ~ ~
~ a ' R~~ 1 , .
C{
_ R~ R8 ' R~,, ~g .
_ R +E
- C4 '
Figure 7.6. Group repeater GUs 12-548 kilohertz
_ All of the stages of~:the repeater are made in accordance with the circuit
with common emitter, and they are encompassed by local (resistors R3, R6,
R13' R15~ and general (circuit R9, C4) negative feedback with respect to
alternating current improving the frequency characteristics and the
stability of the gain of the repeater. The last stage of the repeater is
encompassed by negative feedback with respect to voltage (winding II of
transformer Tp2) which lowers the output impedance of the repeater to
a value of 75 ohms. The input circuit of the GUs, ~ust as of t:~e
auxiliary repeater, is made by the transformer differential. circuit (Tpl, -
R1) permitting us to obtain input impedance of 75 ohms without the spplica-
- tion of a shunt. -
The operating conditions of the tranaistors T1 and T2 with respect to direct -
current are primarily detexmined by the resiators R2, R3, R5, R7, R8,
and the operating conditions of the transistota T3 and T4, by the
- resistors R11, R12~ R13~ R14' R16� The capacitors C5, C9 are blocking;
79
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY ~
C2, C~ are separating, and C1, C4, C8 are correcting the frequency
characteristic of the repeater. 2'he feed circuit of the repeater includes _
the decoupling f ilters C3, R4' ~6' R10~ ~10�
The av~rage gain of the repeater is 43 d.ecibels (5.0 nepers). The
repeate~ does not have a remote gain control. The ~ain control within the
limits of +30 decibels .(+0.3 nepers) is realized by resoldering the
resistor R3.
7.7. KAMA Transceiver -
Transmitter Plate
' The transmitter of the KAMA equipment is made analogously to the transmitter
- of the KRR-M equipment. A distinguis:zing f eature of the transmitter is the
~ fact that the phase-shift low-frequency six-terminal network is executed
- from RC-elements instead of LC-elements, and the modulator is replaced by
a diode instead ~f transiGtor, but it is made from pairs of diodes not
~ requiring selection. In addition, at the output of the tranamitter an .
- amplifying stage is included which permits the attenuation in the transmission
channel to be reduced and it ma.kes it possible to make the parallel operation
of 30 transmitters independent, excluding mutual influence on each other.
The schematic diagram of the transmitter is shown in Fig 7.7. The speaking
~ currents go to the input of the transmitter denoted by the terminals K2, K3
and through the symmetrizing transfor~er Tpl and the repeater based on the -
resistors R1, R3 they reach the input of the low-frequency f ilter D-3,4
(elements L2-L4, C3~C9). The~ attenuatnr matches the filter with the 600-ohm
input of the transmitter and lowers the signal lev~l at the input of the
phase-difference circuit. The attenuation of the attenuator is 14 decibels
- (1.6 nepers); in this cas2 the reflection coeff ic~ent of the input impedance
_ of the transmitter decreases to 10%. The f ilter D-3,4 limits the speaking =
current band to a frequency of 3400 hertz and has~an input impedance of -
, 6 kilohms. In the attenu~tion band th~e attenuati n of the filter does
not drop below 35 decibels (4 nep~rs), and on fre~uencies of 3825, 4130 -
and 6000 hertz the f ilter introduces the maximum attenuations.
~ -
- The si?;nal frequency of 3825 hertz from the stati~ relay module, analogous
to the static relay of the KRR equipment goes t~ *he terminals Y.~, K9. _
This frequency is also f iltered by the band filtex made up of the elements
R2, C2, L1 and it is fed through the resistor R5 to the transmission _
- channel after the filter D-3,4. By the resist:or R~, the signal frequency
level at the input of the cha.nnel is set at 5.0-F~1~ decibels (0.6+0.1 nepers)
below the measuring level. ~
' i
- F.r.om the output of the D-3,4 filter the currents of speaking and signal
- frequencies go to the phase-di~ference circuit for suppressing the fre-
quency sideband (FRS). As is known, the phase-difference circuit is made =
up of rhe p}~ase-shif ting, low-frequency six-terminal ne~work (FSSh), two -
t
_ i _ -
, 80 ~ -
~
FOR. OF.EZCZAL IISE..ONL7~ ~A..i . .
~ I -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~
FOR UFFICIAL USE ONLY
modulators, the carrier frequency phase shift circuit and the adder. In
order to obtain a relative phase ahift of 90� at the inputa of the modulators
of the FRS, the initial low-frequency eignal is f irat converted to two
opposite-phase (that is, 180� aut of phase relative to each other) voltages
of equal amplitude. This is achieved by using a stage based on the
transistor T1 called a phase-inverse stage or invertor. The input impedance -
of the stage is equal to 6 kilohms; its operating conditions are determined
; by the divider R4, R5 and the resistor R3 of the gttenuator. The invertor
load is made up of the resistors R6 and R~. Inasmuch as the signal phase
in the collector circuit of the transistor di.ff ers by 180� from the signal
phase in the emitter circuit, on the r~~istors R6 and R~, voltages occur, -
the relative phase shift between which is 180�. These voltages are fed to
the RC phase-shifting ele~ent. The first element containa the resistors -
_ Rg, R11 and the capacitors Cll-C13 ; t~ie second element contains the resistors
Rlp, R12 and the capacitors C~~, C15' The loads of the elements are the
capacitors C14, C16, on the plates of which voltages occur which are 90�
out of phase with ea.ch other. The error in the phase difference of the FSSh
in the frequency spectrum of 300-3800 hertz does not exceed 2�, which per- _
mits suppression of the frequency sideband by no leas than 30 decibels
(3.5 nepers). The voltage amplitudes in the branches of the FSSh are -
equalized by the tximming resistor Rg in the emitter circuit of the inverter.
The rated load resistance of the elements of ~;he FSSh is equal to 15 kilohms.
For matching such a high output impedance of the elements with small input
impedance of the diode converters, each of the branches of the phase-
diff erence circuit includes emitter repeaters executed from the transistors
T2 and T3 (P416B type). The resi.ators R13, R14' R17' R15' R16~ R18 insure
the operating conditions of the corresponding transistors. The currents
of speaking and signal frequencies go through the separating capacitors
- C17, C18 to the modulators of the phase-di.ff erence circuit branches.
Ring modulators executed from pairs of diodes of the GD-404AR type (the
diodes D2-D5) not requiring selection are used in the transmitter of the
KAMA equipment. The windings of the output transformer Tp4 do not have ~
midpoints; therefore the volCage of carrier frequency to the modulator
_ diodes is fed to the midpoint af the capacitive dividers formed by the
- capacitors C24, CZS, and C26, C27. Inasmuch as the pairs ~f diodes GD-404AR
_ do not require selection, the degree of balancing of the converter (the
degree of suppression of the current carrier is d~termined only by th~
- asymmetry of the modulator circuit (for example, the halfwindings of the
transformers TP2, Tp3 are naC identical, the cap~citors C2[~-C27 have -
. scattering, and~so on). WhQn necessary the exact balancing of the converters
is rea.ched by installir.g additional trimming capacitances CZp, C2~, and C22,
- C23 parallel to the divider capacitors. The additional boundary of the ~
residue of the carrier frequency ia accomplished by the trimming resistora -
R21-R24. -
81
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
. f~
. '
~ .
~
a'o ~ v
m +~c C
Y ~ ~ ~ ` ^ ~ Y~ . ~~Z ~ ~
v ~ ~
4:
~
- ~Oe~ . ~4~ .
ti h
G~
~
~h ~h ~N ~h
VN V`~` C)`+ CJ~ ~ ~ `
' a . ~
~
o a
z~~ ti~ '~fy . ~
r-. b, v~
7 ~ ~ a~
s ~
`I r ;G J L J ~
- ` : - ' ~n
~ - 'ct ~ ~
-
~
~C ~`ra� ~O'M ~"~..1 .
h' ^ ~
_ V ~ V . . t{..~
~ ~
� ~N
~'7 ~
~ ~ ~ ~ ~
~ ~ J l~
~ Oc 1~
~t ~
, ~ a
" a , cd
- ~Ci a? y 1-1
~�j yn H
o -
c~
~ ' . ~
o~ . .
. n
~ ~c^ N
H
~ � v'' ~
v I tii b0
_ , a ~'V~ ~rl L? _
. ~I
b
y"~ I ~~~h ~ 11 ~ ~
~ a
~ ~h ~ ~r1 ~ O -
~ ~ ~ ~
- 1~ ,C iJ fn Ul
,,,G` ~ 1~ U 1.~ ~ JJ
~r'~ v~l S.~ e-~I rl
~ ~--1 ~ d O O
~ y . , ti ~N C+ ~ Li 1-1 ~ ~
~ ti ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~y ~ ~
~ ~ N �,~~~v^ ~ � H~HU? I =
r ~c ~ r a Y.
. re ~ E . .
^ r-{NM~7U1~0
v N
- v ~ .
~
~..i, .
82
FOR OFF'ICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY _
The carrier frequency phase shift circuit is executed from the elementa
L5, C19 and it ia used to obtain a relative phase difference of 90� -
between the carrier aecillations of the modulatora of the phase-diff erence
circuit. The coil L5 can be used to regulate the degree of suppiession
of the undesirable aideband. In order to increase the stability of the -
degree of suppreasion for carrier level fluctuations the resistors R19,
R20 are used.
In the transformer Tp4 the currents of the undesirable aidebande are
- suppressed, and the currents of the usable aidebands are aummed and go to
the output amplifying stage of the tranamitter (T4 type P416). The basic
purpose of the terminal amplifier is to ineure independent parallel opera-
~ tion of the transmitters of the 30 channeZs. For this purpoae the stage ie
_ made from a trans3.stor included according to the circuit with common base _
(OB), that is, by the circuit having small input and large output impedancea.
The collectors of the transistors of all 30 transmitters are ~oined together
and connected to a common output (aumming) transformer structurally located
in the D-552 filter module.
In order to obtain a 75-ohm output of the transmitters, a shunt (a resistor
R3, see Figure~ 7.1, 7.2) is install~d in the secondary winding of the _
summing transformer Tp. Inasmuca as the ouCput impedance of one stage is
several hundreds of kilohms, the load of the tranamitters is determined
only by the shunt resistance, which insures constancy of the output level
independently of the number of simultaneously operating transmitters. The
output level of the transmitter will be -47.3 decibels (-5.45 nepers) on
a load of 75 ohms. The output level contro 1 within the limits of +1.7
decibels 0.2 nepers) is provided b.y the resistor R31'
The feed of the collector circuits of the output stages is realized from
a parametric voltage stabilizer located in the D-552 filter m~dule. The
resistors R29-R3l insuring operating conditions of the output stage of the
transmitter are installed there. The phase inverter and the emitter
repeaters of the transmitter receive power from the parametric voltage
stabilizer D1, R3 2. A stabilized voltage of 9 volts is fed from the
stabilitron D1 also to the rec2iver to feed the preliminary and terminal
stages of the low-frequency amplifier. The feed to the divider R29, R30
of the output~stage of the transmitter comes from the parametric
_ stabilizer located in the reception plate.
Receiver Plate
_ The channel receiver is executed in accordanee with the structural diagram
ahown in Fig 7.8.
The distinguishing ~eature of the receiver ie the absence of a band filter _
at its input, in connection with which summary signals come to the demodu-
= lator of each receiver immediately from the 30 channels. After the demodu-
- lation on the carrier frequency of the given aFian~el the difference
product of conversian of this channel is located in the frequency band -
= 83
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
of up to 4 kilohertz and it is separated from the converted signals of
the remaining channels by the filter D-4,0. However, the useful signal
_ level with this method of demodulation is very small and in order to
obtain the required gain, the preamplifier PrUs ia included in the _
receiver circuit after the transistor demodulator.
Q~,~ Q-y np.�c Q-.i,~, ox.rc. (3) Qai
_ x ,a, p
~ D mpaKma
~i) ~2> c4~
er n~-3als a~~,
5) ,J ~ IlC9 cu2N
. ~ (7) mp?l8~
- Figure 7.8. Structural diagram of the receiver of the KAMA
equipment
Key:
l. Input
2. PrUs = preamplifier
3. Ok Us = terminal stage of the low-frequency amplifier
4. Output of the speaking channel -
5. W
6. PF-3825 -
7. PSU = control signal trigger receiver .
8. Signal channel output
Another distinguishing f eature of the receiver is the signal separation
of the speaking and signal channels immediately after detection of them.
The D-3,4 filter of the receiver is included before the terminal stage of
the low-frequency amplifier OkUs and it does not pass the signal frequency -
to the input of the terminal amplifier. This excludes intelligible cross- ;
talk with respect to the signal channel occurring when overloading the -
terminal repeater.
The schematic diagram of the receiver is presented in Fig 7.9.
_ The signals of all 30 channels go to the receiver input denoted by the
terminals K6, Kg. The L-type attenuator R20, R21 which prevents overload-
ing of the demodulator ax~~: lowers the group signal level at its input to
-36 decibe~.s (-4.1 nepers) is included at the input of the receiver. The
- demodulator DM of tl~e receiver is made ~rom the transistnrs T4, T5, type
P416, and it introduces a voltage gain o� no less than 17 decibela
_ (2 nepers). The carrier frequency is fed to the emitter circuit of the
' transistors with a voltage of 1.2 volts. The resistors R17, R18 included
in the emitter circuits stabilize the demodul.ator parameters on variation
of the temperature and fluctuations of the feed voltage.
84
FOR OF_F,~GY~..US$_.QIJLY., _
~ � . .
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
- r . c1 c, c4 ~ T
- Kl TP, rpr ~ ~ Tv3 C~ Ts �
6a~x. I ~ R~ Rs C~ C! C7 n ~r R~ Tp~ R~ ,Kp
~l ~ n~ R R~ Rr R~ RQ ~1 ~s ~e R ( ! 8,~.
I r~ , o
~t : ~~t ~Q~a ~~K~ (2)
, R~ Rg ~t 'P~ Rr.v X9
~ X~
. . ~ x;~
-sve (5) . . Ri9 .,B~g,
Np
~
Bb~xncy rF , Rrz Rr~ . ar _o Kr -
~ f) ~ r~ Rt1 T8 ~J ~ -
L6 . . _
' ~JJ I ~ ' ' , �
; ~ ~ R1f C4 Rre ~is y c,~ .
. T9 , .
C~6 3D +,98~ ~ '
Figure 7.9. Receiver of the KAMA equipment
Key:
1. Low-frequency output
2. Input
3. -9 volts -
4. +9 volta
5. -fi0 volts
6. PSU output -
The demodulator load is the filter D-4 (L5, C10-C12) which passes only the
frequency band of its channel. The resistors R15, R1 6 stabilize the input
and output impedances of the filter equal to 11 kilohms. The filter
attenuation on a frequency of 3400 hertz does not exceed 0.9 decibels
- (0.1 neper); on a frequency of 8 kilohertz it is more than 17 decibele
(2 nepers). .
- The low-frequency preamplifier PrUs is executed from the transistor T3,
type MP41A, and it is loaded on the filter D-3,4 (L2-L4, C2-C8) providing
for suppression of the producta, the frequencies of which exceed 3400 hertz.
The operating conditions of the stage are atandardized by the reaistors -
R12-R14; the stage load is the resistor R11'
- The terminal repeater is executed by the two-cycle circuit based on the
tranaistors Tl, T2, type MP40, and it operatea in the clase A mode. In
this mode both halfwaves of the aignal are amplified; therefore, the -
total harmonic coefficient of this stage ie minimal and doea not exceed
1.5 Y. The stages encompassed by negative feedback with respect to current
(R4, R5) and voltage (the feedback winding of the transform,er Tpl to the
- resistors R1, R2). The atage mode is stabilized b;~ the reaietore R4-R~.
~
85
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
The circuit L1, C1, R3 included in the feedback circuit of the repeater is
- tuned to a frequency of 3,4 kilohertz, and it corrects the frequency
characteristic of the channel in the upper frequency region. The depth
of correction can be changed by the resistor R3 if necessar.�y.
- The signal level at the output of the receiver is regulated within the
limits of +4.3+2.6 decibels (+0.5+0.3 nepers) by the variable resistor
type SP (R19) included in the emitter cir.;:uit of the demodulator.
T.he signal frequency of 3825 hertz goes after amplification by the PrUs to _
the input of the auxiliary repeater Ws executed from the transistor T9.
The stage is made resonant for f=3825 hertz and introduces a gain only on
this frequency. For other frequencies the circuitry of the stage is _
equivalent to the circuitry for including the transistor with OK and has
a high input impedance not shunting the speaking frequency current. The
stage mode is stabilized by the resistors Rg, R10~ R30'
The auxiliary repeater operates in the limiting mode, which improves the
operating reliability of the signal channel on fluctuation of the signal
_ frequency level.
The load of the repeater is the band filter P-3825 (L6, L~, C15-C17) which
separates the signal frequency of 3825 hertz and does not pass the currents
of the remaining frequencies. The pass band of the filter is 150 hertz.
_ The trigger receiver of the control signals PSU (the transistors Tg, T~,
T6, analogous to the PSU of the KRR-M equipment) is included at the filter
_ output. The resistor R27 establishes the response threshold of the PSU.
The operating current of the receiver is 45+3 milliamps with a load of
1200 ohms. The PSU receives power from the 60 volt DC power supply. The
- f eed goes to the demodulator from the same power supply through the para-
metric stabilizer R29, D2. The 9 volt stabilized voltage reaches the
remaining assemblies of the receiver from the transmitter plate.
7.8. Generating Equipment
Structural Diagram of the Generating Equipment
- Thirty individual carrier frequencies of the channels, the control frequ~ncy
~ of 304 kilohertz, the auxiliary frequency of 296 kilohertz, the group
carrier frequency of 560 kilohertz and signal frequency of 3825 hertz are
needed for operation of the SIG bay of the KAMA equipment. The equipment
for obtaining the indicated frequency designed to f eed up to four SIG bays ?
is located in the SGO bay, the functional diagram of which appears in
Fig 7.10.
- . 86
_ FOR OFFICIAL~USE ONLY -
- ' ~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
3!' rPr Py 4 r R 1.
~ 1~ e K P/l-8
I Ri ~ cnraex (11~
' cu~
~7(' ~4 B Rii %~n Ru R~4 f
r Ra 8~ . ~17 ) " Bcnonfazam. ~12)
2 rre Tg - vacmamsl9sN'u
- ~ ) yacm"'omu 18) `Ht~n~n.
R NC ~ u~i u ud.
rr 3B2S~r~ s . 1 Hecyu~.
, ~5~ ,
~3~ 6I1 ~6~ ~ 19) 9cmy ~~4~ ~
I ~uNduQud.
_sQ~i nay
1 ney:~ Hecy:~.. 15
6n ~
~7 ' 8) � (9) (21 J . y~~~ma )
~ ~~nna~~a(1~6j :
- 60B ~ ec u~..
( 20 ' J6~nrK
Figure 7.10. Functional diagram of the KAMA generating equipment
Key:
1. ZG = master oscillator 11. To the PII-8 of the SIG bays _
- 2. GTV= ringer oscillator 12. Auxiliary frequency 295 kilohertz
3. BP = power packs 13. Odd individual carriera
4. RU 14. Even individual carriera r- _
5. Signal frequency 3825 hertz 15. Control frequency 304 kilohertz
6. UsGG = resonance repeater 16. Group carrier 560 kilohertz
7, PW-I � speak-buzz modules 17. G-296
, 8. PW-II = speak-buzz modules 18. GIN - individual carrier generator
9. FT 19. KU
10. NS ?0. UGN = group carrier frequency
repeater
21. GKCt~ - control frequency generator
t~iill of the frequencies with the exception of the frequency of 3825 hertz
are multiples of 8 kilohertz, and a harmonic syatem with reference frequency
of 8 kilohertz is used to obtain them. The latter is obtained from the
master oscillator ZU module and goes to the decoupling module RU to the
differential transformer Tp2. The transformer has two outputs. Four
attenuators which are parallel with respect to input R~, R14; R8, R13~
R9~ R12~ R10~ Ril With an attenuation of 14.8 decibels (1.7 nepers)
each are connected to one of them loaded on the resistor R6. The signals -
from the outputa of the attenuatora go to the PII-8 modulea of the SIG
bays and then to the line for synchronizing the oppoaite offices. The ~
second output of the TP2 ie connected through the a~~tenuator R2, R3, R4
with a total attenuation of 30 decibels (3.:~ nepers) to the output di�fer-
ential sqstem Tpl. The outpute o� this ditferential system are connected .
- to the harmonic generator modules GG. The reaistors R1, RS are the
balancing resiatances of the differential systems.
87
FOR OFFIGIAL U~E ONLY _
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
; rux ur�r�~c1aL us~: UNLY
The toggle switch B is used to switch the external synchronization or
synchronization mode from the local ZG master oscillator. In large
' telephone exchanges equipped with a single synchronization system, the
reference frequency of S kilohertz goes to the RU module from the circuits
' of the synchronization network, and the ZG modules of the SGO bays are not
used.
The harmonic generator is a frequency multiplier, and has two outputs:
even and odd harmonics. The individual carrier frequency generators (GIN) _
of the even channels and the control frequency generator of 304 kilohertz _
(GKCh) are connected to the even harmonic output; the odd channel GIN, the
- auxiliary frequency generator of 296 kilohertz (G-296) and the group -
carrier frequency repeater (UGN) are conr.ected to the odd harmonic output.
The monitor (KU) is used to monitor theoperation of the generators and the
_ UGN. The signal frequency of 3825 hertz is generated by the ringer oscillator
GTV. The frequency is used to feed the static relays of the SIG bays.
In the ICAMA equipment provision is made for the ozganization of a link -
between operators for which two speak-buzz modules PVU-I and PVU-II are
installed in the SGO bay. The link between operators can be formed over
- the high-frequency channel and aver phantom circuits (the midpoints of the
line transformers). For organization of the link between operators o~ with
the phantom circuits, the phantom transformer module is used (FT). -
The power for the generating equipment and the PW modules comes from the
BP power pack.
Master Oscillator
The master oscillator ZG (Fig 7.11) is made up of the two-stage repeater
~ with transformer coupling between stages and bridge type feedback circuit.
Both stages of the amplifier are made in accordance with the circuitry with _
common emitter. In the first stage the transistor T2 (MP41) is used; in
_ the second stage, Tg (P214). The resistors R3, R4, R6 and Rg, R9, R10
stabilize the operating conditions of the corresponding transistors. In -
addition the resistor Rl~ not shunted by the capacitor creates negative
- feedback with respect to current improving the characteristics of the out-
put stage.
The output transformer TP2 has three windings: winding I is connected to
the collector T3; winding II is the output winding, and winding III is
connected to the feedback bridge diagonal. The feedback bridge is used
to stabilize the frequency and level of the output signal o� the generator.
- The 'aigh relative stability of the generation frequency (on the order of
_ 3�10-6) is achieved by i~icluding the quartz resonator KV in one arm of the
- bridge. This reaonator operates with the series resonance frequency of
8000 hertz. It is possible to vary the generation frequency within ~
small l:imits by the capacitors C1, C2.
, t
, 88
FOR OFFICI USE 0~~~7,X
1..1.?'lil .C'.G~ ~LH.1J11'iV hV1
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
- ' u lv_""_.�-f -
R~ Rs 1 d ed~x (1)
_ K ' ~ r K
~ 3 ~ a}mp _
H~9 l CS Rri e~x ~2~
K; ~t . .
- ~ R~ I Rb Rg . Rp .
t ~4
~~'f .
+f -
f,Y~ ~ .
~ , 2~3 ~4~ '
tx, -7 ,~p~
n n g! -
o ? 2
+ T
Figure 7.11. Master oscillator
Key: -
1. Output
2. Control output -
3. KV - quartz resonator
- 4. NE - heating element
The output signal level is stabilized by the thermistor R1 included in the
other arm of the bridge. The operating conditions of the thermietor with
respect to the rate current are given by the resiator R4 which together
with the resistor RS forms the oppoaite arms of the f eedback bridge. The
_ generator output voltage equal to 1.25+0.1 volts can be regulated by the
resistor R2. _
In order to exclude the temperature effects on the generation frequency,
= the thermistor and quartz resonator are placed in a thermostat with a
i.~~rmostating temperature of 50�C. The thermostating control circuit is
made using the mercury thermocoatactors TK.
On inclusion of the module, the negative potential of -60 volts is fed
through the resistor R7 to the base circuit of the T1. The transiator is
completely opened, the relay P1 responds and by the contact 3-4 cloaes
the heating element circuit NE, switching on the heating.
When thc temperature in the thermoetat reaches 50�C, the thermocontactor TK1
shunts t:he bay circuit of the T1. The transistor cloaes, and the relay P1
~sponds, o~ening the contact 3-4. The heating stops. After some reduc-
tion in temperature the TK1 opens, T1 opene and the relay Pi again responde,
switching on the heating. Then the proc~sa is repeated. The awitching of
the heating on and off is noted by the light L1 (when the heating element
_ NE op~:ates the light burnR).
89 -
FOR OFFICIAL U~E ONLY -
~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
If for any reason the heating is not shut off at 50�C, then when it reaches
60�C the thermocontactor TK2 is included. The relay P2 responds, the
contact 1-2 disconnects the heating circuit. The circuit for the light L2
is closed, and the emergency signal goes into operation.
Harmonic Generator
The harffionic generator GG is an 8 kilohertz frequency multiplier. It is
made up of the resonance repeater UsGG and the nonlinear systems. In
contrast to the KRR equipment where the UsGG for stabilizing the output
level is made in the form of an autooscillator operating in the mode with
locking, the UsGG of the KAMA equipment is made in the form of a resonance
repeater with automatic gain control. T~he nonlinear system (NS) which
loads the repeater is analogous to the NS of the KRR-M equipment.
The schematic diagram of the harmonic ~enerator is shown in Fig 7.12.
R~ '
. Q , x~ ~ ~o t
~ QZ i r ~ .1.~
R~ .~J ~ ~ ~~l +I`-~f--~~/ ~
~ R~ ~a~~s~~~ i GI I ~l
rt~ I 1 ~ 8::~~
1
C~ T1 ~3 i~ Ry ~ i ~ i ' ~ 2~
i ~ ~L
~ 1 J
RS C4 j~ TS J 'Q~ 'LJ ~Qy
aX s~r~ R
~1` F' J 'L` T2 ps CJ ~ ~ ' c4ijX.+
~ ~ t3)
Figure 7.12. Harmonic Generator
Key:
1. 8 kilohertz input
2. Outputl
3. Output2
The UsGG is made up of auxiliary repeater and the power amplifier. The
auxiliary repeater is made two-stage. The transistor T1 (type MP40) of
the first stage of the amplifier is included in accordance with the circuit
with common collector (OK), which makes it possible to obtain high input
impedance of the amplifier required for matching to the decoupling module.
The UsGG is connected to the latter through the separating capacitor C1.
The second stage of the amplifier the resonance stage is executed
from the transistor T3 (MP41 type) included in accordance with the circuit
with common emitter, and it is encompassed by local negative feedback
_ (the resistor R5). The coupling between the first and second stages is
- direct, and the operating conditions of the transistors are determined by
_ the resistors R1-R3, R5, R. The load of the second stage is the circuit
formed by the inductance o~ the primary winding o� the transformer Tpl~
90
FOR OF~~C,IA~,. L,U~ _ Q~X . -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
the inductance coil L1 and the capacitance C4. The tuning frequency of
the circuit ia 8 kilohertz. The winding II ia used for automatic gain
_ control (AGC) of the auxiliary repeater. For thia purp~ae the signal
voltage induced in the winding II is rectif ied by the diodes DZ-D3 and
_ smoothed by the capacitor C2. It is fed to the baee of Tz. The
negative control voltage with respect to the base of the T2, depending on
its magnitude, opens T2 to a greater or leaser degree, ehunting the input
circuit of the second amplification stage. The limits of the automatic
gain control are established by the reaistor R,~.
For greater gain stability the auxiliary repeater ia fed from a parametric
voltage etabilizer Rq, Dl.
From the winding ZII of the transformer Tpl signal goea to the power
amplifier the two-cycle output eta~e based oa the transistors T4, TS
- type P214. The traneistors are included in accordance with the circuit
with common emitter and they are encompassed by local negative feedback
(the reaistors R7, R8). The load of the terminal stage ia a circuit formed
by the primary winding Tp2 and the capacitors CS-C~. By using the capacitors
the circuit is tuned tc, a frequency of 8000 hertz.
The UsGG autput is loaded on the nonlinear system made up of the circuit L2,
Cg-C10 tuned to 8 kilohertz, the nonlinear coil L3, the capacitor C11, the
- frequency doubler D4-D~ and the pulse transformers Tpg, TP4. As a result
of operation of the magnetic generator at theoutput of the Tpg, a sign-
variable p~:lse train is formed containing the odd harmonics of frequency
8 ki.lohertz. The even harmonics are obtained at the output of the TP4 after
doubling the pulse repetition frequency.
The mutual protection of the even and odd outputs of the harmonic generator
is no less than 26 decibels (3 nepers); the voltage of the harmonics used
is about 150 millivolts.
The harmonic generator receives power from the 60 volt DC power supply.
Individual Carrier Frequency Generator
- The individual carrier frequency generator (GIN) is designed to feed the
individual channel converters of the SIG bays with carrier fxequency
- currents. The schematic diagram of the generator ia shown in Fig 7.13.
The GIN is made up of the band filter ~F analogous to the GIN filter of the
KRR equipment and the three-stage amplifier. The filter connected to the
corresponding output of the GG separates the required harmonic of the
8 kilohertz reference signal required for synchronizing the GIN. However,
the voltage of the separated harmonic (several tens of millivolta) is
_ insufficient for direct synchronization of the generator. Therefore the
_ firat atage o~ the GIN plays the role of the synchronizing signal repeaCer.
91
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY .
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR UFFICIAL U5~ UNLY ;
~/laamaN�f ~1~-------------~~_f
; ro, R� R,~ Tuz : I.
i ~6I 4~ ~ R =fe, ~ -
, R] RS ~R t" ( Rs ~ Ba~a ( S)
7 + Cs ]
(3) i R~ Ti Q~ ` ~ ,
n~ ' T, r ~ .R
- I R~o y ~ n B
j Rr Ri Rs ~t R8 Ris R ~ ~I(9~ 6~
~~4,� ~------I-- - R rejl~' _
3 't ~
(2) /lnama N�? da~x
-f (5)
' Rto
Figure 7.13. Individual carrier frequency generator
Key: c
_ 1. Plate No 1
2. Plate TTO 2
3. PF
4. From GG
5. Output
6. KiJ
The amplification stage is assembled from the tra~sistor Tl, type P416,
_ included in accordance with the circuit with common emitter. The resistor
R1 matches the input impedance of the stage to the output impedance of t:~e -
filter, and ~ointly with the resistor R2 forms the L-type attenuator which
regulates the voltage of the s egregated harmonic at the input of the
amplifying stage. The operating conditions of the first stage with respect
to direct current are insured by the resistors R3, R[~, R6. The capacitor _
C2 is blocking. _
~ The second stage (the Cransistor T2, type P416) is an autooscillator operating -
in the mode with lock-on. The coupling between the first and second stages
is direct. The autooscillator is assembled in accordance with the circuit
with transformer teedback. The positive feedback voltage is picked up from
the secondary winding of the transformer Tpl and is f ed to the emitter circuit
of T2. The narural frequency of the autooscillator is determined by tuning _
the circuit made up of the primary winding Tpl and the capacitors Cq, C5. :
For stabilization of the output level of the generator, the oscillatory
circuit Tp1C4C5 is shunted by the D1C3R~ circuit. For positive halfperiods
of the oscillations occurri~g in the circuit, the current goes through the -
_ stabilitron D1, as a resulC of which a DC voltage is formed on the capacitor
plates C~ promoting symmetric restriction of the oscillations in the circuit
and maintenance of their amplitudes on one level. With respect to direct
current the circuit D1C3R~ forms a parametric voltage stabilizer which
stabilizes .the voltage on the collectors of the rransistors T1 and T2.
The resistors R5, R8, R9 insur e operating conditions of the ttooscillator
with respect to direct current. The relative lock-on band wi.lth is .
- g~
FOR OFF.~~IA~_.USE ONLY . .
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED F~R RELEASE: 2007102/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
selected by the resistor RZ such that the drift~of the natural freq.uency of
_ the autooscillator from the rated frequency by"+3.5 to 4.5 kilohertz
does not cauae it to drop out of synch.
Tlie output voltage of the autooscillator picked up from the feedback winding
is f ed through the resistor R10, the potentiometer R12 and the dividing
capacitor C~ to the output stage (the tranaiators T3 type MP40A and T4 type -
- P416) which is an oscillator with external excitation. The operating -
conditions of the transiators T3 and T~ with respect to direct current are
insured by the resistors R14~ =~15~ R16' R19 and the stabilitron D2. The ~
capacitor C3 is blocking. The output voltage equal t~ 1.2+0.1 volts
_ is regulated by the potentiometer R12. The resistor Rlg is a ballast
resistor, and it is disconnected on connecting 3 and 4 SIG bays. The output
- signa.l gass through the resistor R17 and the toggle switch B to the KU module
which monitors the synchrony of the GIN. The circuits R11, C6 and R13, C$
are feed f ilters. The feed of the module is from a 24 volt DC power supply.
Two generators (even and odd channels) are placed in one GIN module, -
excluding the GIN of the 29th and 30th channela which are placed in the
same module.
' Control and Auxiliary Frequency Generators (GKCh and G-296)
The control frequency generator GKCh is designed to feed the SIG bays with ~
control frequency currents of 304 kilohertz, and the G-296 generator to f eed
the SIG bays with the auxiliary frequency currents of 296 kilohertz E-~hich
is used as the carrier in the PKK1.
~ The structural diagrams of the GKCh and G-296 do not diff er from the struc-
tural diag�ram of the GIN. The differences in the schematic diagrams -
consist in tihe fact that the transistor of the first stage is connected
to the GKCh and the G-296 with respect to the circuit with common base.
This circuit d~.agram is simpler, it insures good inatching with the input
and filter and on the frequencies of the harmonics used introduces
- amplification with respect to voltage sufficient for reliable synchroniza- _
tion of the autooscillator. The output stage of the GKCh and the G-296
is made not from two transistors as in the GIN, but one transistor connected
according to the circuit with common emitter. Here, in addition to the
_ oscillation amplitude stabilization circuit in the autooscillator (the
circuit D1, C3, R~ in F~.g 7.13) the GKCh has temperature stabilization
of its operating conditions using a thermistor included in the base -
- divider circuit of the output stage transistor. In the same generator,
stepped regulation of the output voltage is used inetead of continuous.
As a result of the enumerated measures the relative atability of the output
level of the GKCh does not exceed +0.03 nepers (0.3 decibels).
No increased requirements with respect to time and temperature atability
are impased on the G-296 generator, and therefore the corresponding -
stabi~.ization circuits are excluded from the G-296.
93
FOR OFFICIAL USE u?dL,Y -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
_ ~S OF ~ . THE MUL _ ~ OF
C I TY TELEPHONE C I RCU I TS BY TS. L. TRRRSO~JA RND R. S. KORNEYE~ ~

29 FEBRURRY 1980 tF0U0) 2 OF 2
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02108: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
I -
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
, The rated output voltage o� the GICCh and the G-29~ genaratars will be ~
1.2 volts. The generator is fed from a 24 volt DC power supply.
Croup Carrier Frequency Repeater
The group carrier frequency repeater UGN is designed tn feed the group
converters of the SIG bays with 56~ kilohertz currents. In contrast to the
KRR equipment, a frequency of 560 kilohertz in the UGN of the KAMA equipment
- is obtain.ed by doubling the frequency of 280 kilohertz (the 35th harmonic ~
- of 8 kilohertz frequency). This is caused by an ~fforr_ to simplify the
_ structural design ot the P-280 band filter inclu~ied at the input of the
- amplifier (Fig 7.14)�
. . R~
~ -f
~ RN -
p q
Z~i I L S ~4`_ 'YO _
To ~s ~1~
r r, Ct l~, J ~ R~mA
P, 1 z 7~ � y :~x
~ ~ C�r3;,u -
. ' ny ~ ~F,, '(2)
~3
~ '-L
BO t, r , ~4 ~s ~
t ~
- ~ .R; R6 l R9 ~'n Rrt -
ti
n, r- p~!
2 . Rd E
_ Figure i.14. Group carrier frequency repeater
_ Key: `
l. Control output
2. Output
3. PF-280 band f ilter
- The repeater is connected to the odd output of the harmonic generator _
- thraugh the P-280 filter. Tlie signal segreated by the filter is fed to the -
two-stage 280 kilohertz repeater. The first stage of the repeater is _
made from the MP40 transistor T1 executed by the circui~ with common base. _
This arrangement makes it possible to obtain a low input impedance of the
stage required to match with the P-280 filter.
- The first stage is directly connected with the second stage, the transistor
T2, type P416 of which is included in accordance aith the circuit with _
~ common emitter. The res3stors R1-R5 define the operdting conditions of -
the two transistors with respect to direct current. The capacitor C1 is
blocking. The stage load is the transformer Tpl, from~~.the secondary -
winding of which the signal is fed to the frequency doubler.
The frequency doubler is made from the transisto~-s T3, T4, type MP40 ~
- included in acc~rdance with the circuit with common base. The transistors
~ -
94 _
. FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
- ~.ttr!l1 .~l ~.~~.a~.l l'l~J /1V..
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
- do not have bias oii the emittera, and therefore they amplify only the
= positive ha~fwave of the signal. The tranaistore are opened alternately
- and in the common collector circuit ttie current has the ahape of unipolar
pulses (as for the Cwo-halfperiod rectification). This signal containe
- even harmonica of 280 kilohertz fraquency. The circuit made up of the
primary ~rinding Tp2 and the capacitor CZ is tuned to Chz aecond harmonic
frequency the frequency of 560 kilohertz. With respet to direct current
the multi.nlier receives power through the parametric voltage stabilizer R7, _
D1, C3. Inasmuch as the feed voltage ie f ed to the transitor collectors
through the multiplier circuit, the amplitude of the current oscillations
. at a frequency of 560 kilohertz in the circuit Tp2, C2 cannot exceed the
- voltages on the stabilitran9 ar,d the latter op~rates as an amplitude limiter.
' The signal voltage in the circuit remains unchanged even for voltage
oscillations at the input of the mo3ule.
From the secondary winding of the TP2 the signal goes to the input of the -
560 kilohertz repeater. The repeater ia made two-stage; both traneistors -
- are included by the circuit with common emitter. The first stage based
on the transistor T5 (P416 type) does not have a bias on the base and -
amplifies only the negative halfwave of the signa.l. In the collector cir- -
cuit of the transistor the current has the shape of uniF~lar pulses with
repetition frequency of 560 kilohertz (~uat as for the s:~:?gle-halfperiod
rectification), and it contains odd harmonics of this frequency. The
resonance circuit made up of the primary winding Tpg and the capacitor C4
is tuned to the primary harmonic and separates a frequency of 560 kilohertz
for subsequent amplif ication of it. The R6, C6, R9 are automatic bias
elements. For varying Rg, it is possible td regulate the depth of negative ,
feedback of the stage and the magnitude of the introduced amplification. _
_ The output stage (T6 type II60~) operates in the line mode (it amplifies -
both halfwaves of the signa.l). The DC mode is given by the resistors K10-
R12. The capacitor C9 is blocking; Rg, CS and Rlg, R14, Cg are the f eed
- filters. The load of the terminal stage is a circuit made up of the
primary wihding of the ouzput transformer Tp4 and the capacitor C~. The
- circuit is tuned to a frequer.cy of 560 kilohertz. The secondary winding Tp4 -
is the output winding. The signal voltage at the output of the amplifier
will be 1.8 volts on a load of 25 ohms.
The amplifier is fed from the 60 volt DC po~er supply. ~
- Monitoring -
- The monitor KU is designed to control the synchronization of the GIN, GKCh _
and G-296 modules. The schema.tic diagram of the KU is presented in
Fig 7.15. -
The control outpute of all the generators are c~nnected to the inpixt of the
- module. The group signal is ampli�ied by the preamplifier based on the
transistor T1 (P416). The aperating conditions of the transiator are
95 -
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- r~ox ur�ricl~, U5~ UNLY .
_ given by the resistors R6-R9. Th~e resistor R5 plays the role of a shunt, -
insuring the required input impedance:of KU (on the order of 10 ohms). _
The capacitory C1 is separating, and C3 is blocking.
~ rc~
.
_ _t R ~
P
Ry ~ 6 RB Rn ~r,~ R;s RiB ~ i1
. ,Q! G~ LZ ~n rs
- CZ T ~
r, . rz ~n r�
c,
RS R~ R9 Ri0 Ri2 ~ ~s ~s ~8 ~9 Ria Ras Rid ~i1 Rta
Rp
~ P! ~ ~,~Z,~ .
/1 Y~ .
~CJNX(1. ~
~1~
Figure 7.3.5. Monitor
_ Key:
1. "Out of synch" signal
The second stage based on the transistor T2 (P416) operates in the nonlinear
mode (there is no negative bias on the base) and is a detector. The detection
mode is given by the resistors R10-R1 . For synchronous operation of the
= control generators at the detector ou~put all possible frequency fluctuations ~
are formed which are multiples of 8 kilohertz. The detector load is the
low-frequency filter D-4,0, made up of the elements C4, C5, L1, (:6, C~, -
L2, C$ and C9. Since the cutoff frequency of the filter 3s 4.0 kilohertz, _
far synchronous operation of the controlled generators the voltage at the
filter output is absent. When any generator falls out of synch its frequency
� varies and is not a multiple of 8 kilohertz. Ih this case, the difference
product of conversion appears at the output:of the detector in the pass band � ~
_ of the filter which goes throu~h the separating capacitor C10 to the low-
frequency amplifier (the MP40 type transistors T3, T4). In order to obtain _
a high input impe~ance reqLired for matching with the filter, the first stage
_ of ~he ampl~fier is made in accordance with the circuit with common co~].ector
The coupling between the first and second stages is direct. The operating
conditions of the transistors are given by the resistors R13-R16'
~ The amplified signal is fed to the detector-amplifier (MP40 type T5) and
the switching circuit (T6 type MP26). The capacitor C11 is separating.
In the initial state, that is, in the absence of a signal, T5 is blocked
by a positive potential fed to the base of the transistor through the -
resistor R1~. Through the R18 the T6 is fully opened and the relay P1
- responds. On.appearance of a signal voltage at the.base of the TS the
transistor is opened by negative halfwaves c~f the input signal, and a pulsating
_ current smoothed by the capacitor C12 flows in the collector circuit of the
- T5. As the capacitor is discharged (through the open T5) the negative
_ potential of the base of T6 decreases, and the transistor closes. The
- relay P1 trips, switching on the emergency signal circuit.
96
- FOR OFF~CIAk�~J$F. O~LY � _
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY _
_ The monitor receives the ~:urrent from the DC 60 volt power supply. The
amplifying stages KU are fed through a parametric voltage stabilizer
R3, R4, D1 and the last, awitching stage, through the extinguishing
resistors R1, R2. The capacitor C13 amooths the voltage pulsations
occurring in the rela3~ winding on awitching the circuit.
Ringer Oscillator
The ringer o~cillator GTV (Fig 7.16) is used to obtain a frequency of
3825 hertz which is used to feed the atatic relays of the SIG bays. The
first stage based on the transiator T1 (MP40) ia the autooscillator executed
by the differential bridge circuit. The L1, C2, C3, C4 circuit ie tuned
to a generation frequency of 3825 hertz. The resistors R3, R4 inaure
generation stability. In addition, these resistors ~ointly with the resistors
Rl, R2 create feed conditions of the autooscillator with reapect to direct -
current. 'Phe capacitor C1 is blocking, C5 is dividing. Within the limits _
~ of +2 hertz the generation frequency can be varied by the trimmer Cg. The
relative frequency stabi~.ity of the oscillator wi11 be 3�10'3 .
Rr? -~(1~ -
R3 ' R8 ~i~,
Kuam~db~a
~ .
~~`t~ , R Xu+~m ond ~~ocm
~ � ~al RS ~ 2~
~l~4 ps ~ I w~,E ~1~
~ I R .4
, ! ~ ~ ~ T p n ki5
R~ I
~ f,::! rr, =
~
_ ~ I r ~ T . _
~ , ; a1 R. ~s ~jR~ d� -
( i _
Figure 7.16. Ringer Oscillator
Key: ~ -
, 1. Control output -
2. Control frequency
The signal of the autooscillator is amplified by a two-stage amplifier.
In order to decrease the effect of the load on the oscillation frequency,
_ the input impedance of the amplifier ia made high-resistance. For this
purpose the transistor T2 (MP40) af the first stage of the amplifier is _
connected in accordance with the circuit with common collector. The firat
stage of the amplifier is loaded d~.�rectly on the second, the transistor Tg
of which is connected in accordance with the circuit with common emitter.
- The operating conditions of the two atages with respect to direct current
- are insured by the resistors Rg-R11. In addition, the reaistor R11 creates
negative �eedback with reapect to current which stabilizAs the operation
of the stage.
97
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
1VL\ V1'liV+Ll.~~ 1.rrra+
The amplifier load is the circuit formed by the inductance of the primary
= winding of the output trdnsformer Tpl and the capacitor C6. The circuit
~ is tuned to a frequency of 3325 hertz. The secor~3ary winding Tpl is the _
- output winding. The reslstors R14-R16 are ballast resistors and are dis-
connected on connecting the secor~d, third ar_d fourth SIG bays. On a load
of 62 ohms the output voltage of the oscillator is 2d0+13 millivolts. The
step voltage regulation is accomplisned by the divider RSR~. The oscillator
has its own parametric voltage stabilizer R12D1 and is powered from a
60 volt DC power supply.
t4onitoring the Operation and Switching the Assemblies of the SGO Bay
In the KAMA generating equipment the following modules are redundant:
ZG, GG, GKCh, G-296, UGN and GTV~ The modules operating in the basic mode -
or in reserve are equivalent; they do not differ with respect to electric
circuitry or with respect to location in the frame of the bay. The monitor-
ing of the state of repair an3 switching of the mo.dules are accompl:Lshed
by the PU switching circ~its (Fig 7.17), the operating principle of wh3_ch
is the same in all modules. ;
ilTy,- - .
' ~ R~~,Q~ e R~ R6 Q~ R8 i
r Rf . If I S p ~
- ~ ~ T lZ ~ ~ .
_ � 2 Js xmB ~tl R' ~I C R' ~'~pr -
00
. ~ ~2~ ~ -
n ~ XlW 4
_ /1~ . ~ ~ r B ` ~ ~
` -60d
_ � < 0
_ , z r b"oa 7 nyj f. ~ ~3~
~ E ; ~
_ . , ~
- Figure 7.17. Switching circuit
Key :
1. To load _
2. Control output
3. .-60 volts
4. To the KU
5. PU1 [switching circuit]
Each of the generators Gl and G2 has a switching circuit analogous to the
PSU of the KRR-M equipment, to the terminals of which the control output _
of the corresponding generator is connected.
If thz voltage at the in~ut of the PU exceeds the threshold voltage
~Uthreshold~~ then T1 is opened, an~ the trigger is in the state in which '
- T2 is closed, and T3 is fully opened. The relay P1 operates and by its
contact 1-2 co~nects the basic output of tb.e generator to load.
98
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007102/08: CIA-RDP82-00850ROOQ2QOQ5Q060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
When the voltage drops or is diminished at the output r~f the generator to
- a value below threahold, T1 closea, the trigger switches, and the relay P1 -
is released, diaconnecting the generator from the load. The collector
- potential of the first transiator, which is close to zero, with T1 open ~
- becomes more negative. This potential is fed to the diode D1 and the
toggle switch B1 to the monitor modul.e where the circuit analogoue to *.he
PU includes the eme'rgency signal.
The failed module is determined by the dropping of the emergency signa.t as
a result of switching off the toggle awitch B1 or B2.
In the case of $imultaneous incluaion of the modulea in a atate of good
_ repair, the generator at the output of which the voltage appears the faster
is connected to the load first. If tiiis generatnr ia G2, then the relay PZ
responds first and by the contacts 3-4 cloees T3, blocking the trigger of
the first switching device in the nonoperating condition.
) 608 ~60~ ( 2 ) �bomape~" '
~i a 'c~ Qs (5)
3) (4. -
f ~ +
Q ~ -
(8) 6 ~ ' Kpaoadori _
~ieMna"am f'- q c emo ou cuz~+
- neucnpa6n QZ (6) -
rt.~n.ro u
"y 9 9 n
~1 ' p~do~OU 34(/KO _
s ~ ~ Q~ 0!L CflZNQpGJOU ,
1 f '
D Z
p~ 7 J
. ~
= Figure 7.1a. Signal cJ.rcuit of the SGO bay
Key:
1. 60 volts
2. -f0 volts
3. Pr _
4. OSL
~ 5. Battery
6. To the row light ~ignal -
_ 7. To the row sound aignal
8. Ground from the failed modules and KU
9. KH button
If the generator G1 is excited first, then the relay P1 responda and by
the analogous contacts 3-4 blocks the trigger of the aecond PU. Thus, only
one of the generatora wi11 always.be connected to load.
- 99 �
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
rvic vrri~icu~ v....~
_ The principle of the SGO bay signal system is explained in Fig 7.18.
_ When there is damage, the positive of the station battery is fed from the
failed modules to the winding of the relay P1 which responds. Through the
circuit made up of the contacts 1-2 of the relay P2, 2-3 of relay P1,
1-3 of button KH, diode D1, the positive is fed to the row sound signal
system. Simultaneously the light L burns to signal that the bell has been
- switched on. On pressing the button Kii the bell circuit opens and the tube
L goes out. The row optical signal system is included as a result of
feeding the positive through the contact 4-6 of the relay P1 and diode D2. -
A common bay light OSL is lit through the diode D3.
If the damage is eliminated, then P1 is released, and the OSL is extinguished. ~
Through the closed contact 3-5 of the button KH, again the bell circuit is
_ closed and the light L burr.s. The button KIi is released, and the signal
system returns to the initial state.
- In case of burning of the common bay protector Pr, the relay P2 responds.
Through its contacts 1-3 the positive is fed to the bell circuit, and ~
through contacts 4-6 and the diodes D4 and D5, to the OSL tube and the
"battery" light of the row signal system.
7.9. Electric Power Supply for the KAMA Equipmen*_
The electric power supply for the KAriA equipment comes from the station ~
battery at 60 (+2) volts. The terminal offices are fed from the battery
directly without application of the current converters and the extinguish- _
ing resistances. The required ~radations of the feed vottages are obtained
using the parametric voltage stabilizers included in series. For extinguish-
ing the excess voltage, the current stabilizer is connected in series with _
the voltage stabilizers. This inclusion of the elements insures high
efficiency o~ the power supplies and improves the stabilization coefficient
of the output voltages.
The feed circuit of the SIG bay (Fig 7.19) contains the series-included
- parametr-~.c voltage stabilizers D2-D7 and the current stabilizer based on _
the transis~ors T1 and T2. The feed circuit elements form three groups pf
stabilizing feed voltages between which the entire load of the bay is
- distributed. The first two groups with 15 volts each are designed for a
load current of 0.4 ~mps. The third feed group with a voltage of 18 volts -
is designed for the same load current. In addition,~:a number of circuits
of the SIG bay are fed directly from the station battery for which the
fourth f eed voltage group of 60 volts is �ormed (not stabilized).
The parametric voltage stabilizer of each group is executed from two
stabilitrons included in series, and it is used to stabilize the output
voltage on variation of the station battery voltage and load current. In
the first and ~econd ~roups the stabilitrons D2-D5, type D315V are used -
with stabilization volta~e of 7.5-8 volts. Thus, the stabilized voltage -
- 100
_ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICTAL USE ONLY
of each of these groups is 15 volta. In the third group the stabilitron
D6�,type D815V and D~ type D815G are included in aeries. The etabilitron
n815G has a stabilization voltage of 10 volta; therefore the stabilized '
voltage of the third group is 18 volta. ~
T _ ~A1 -
2 - -
8
Rr ~ ~ !5~
UN � '
~ ~2) ~ a ~ 3)
_ v r, , Q~ ~ npj
608~, ~ ~ -
~ 1S,�
~1.~ . . u~~.e 4 ~ ~3~ .
. ~6 1!s ~ P4
s n
. QB `
~4 ~s !B~ ~ -
Ll~ ` ~4) -
, ~
Figure 7.19. Feed plate of the 3IG bay
Key: �
1. 60 volts
2. Pr
3. 15 volts
4. 18 volts
S. 60 volts
6. Ustab.
Ucontrol
- As a result of the application of the stabilitrons the independence of the
- load current of one output with iespect to the load current of the other
~ is insured. Thus, if the load current of the first output is abaent, the
entire current goes through the stabilitron, and the load current and
voltage of the other outputs do not change. 'Phe capacitora C1-C3 -
- eliminate the mutual effect of the outputs through the power supply. ~
Simultaneously the positive leads of the first and second outpute with
respect to alternating current (through C4, C5) are connected to the
positive lead of the station battery.
The total voltage of the three successively formed groups of feed voltagea
. will be 48 volts at the same time as the voltage of the atation batiery -
will be 60�2 volts. In order that the excess voltage be extinguished and -
also the load current be stabilized, a c~~rrent stabilizer is connected to
the parametric voltage stabilizer circuit.
_ The current st~bilizer is executed from transiators T1 (P214) and T2 (P2Q1A~.
In practice the entire load current goes through the tranaiator T2;
therefore it is regulating. The magnitude of the current flowing through -
- the transistor depends on the potential of the apace: the more negative
, 101
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
base potential decreases the transist-or resiatance at the same time as the
less negative increases it. In order that the current intake by the feed
- circuit not depend on the load and the station battery voltage, the
resistance of the regulating transistor is made controllable. This is
achieved by using a matching transistor T1, the DC mode of which is given
by the resistors R1, R2 and the stabilitron D1.
The emitter current of the transistor T1 is the base current for T2 and
depends on the controlling voltage Ucontrol' the negative of which is -
_ applied to the base of the T1 transistor. The magnitude of the controlling
voltage is determined by the difference between the voltage drop on the
stabilitron Ustab and the voltage drop Ug fron the load current on R2,
that is, Ucontrol-Us ab UH' The voltage drop on~~the stabilitron (8 volts)
does not depend on t~e load current and is strictly constant. The voltage _
drop on the resistor R2, on the other hand, is directly dependent on the
- load current: it increases with an increase in load current and decreases
when the load current decreases. Being the difference of two voltages,
the controlling voltage decreases correspondingly (that is, it becomes
less negative) with an increase in the load current, and it increases (that -
is, becomes more negative) with a decrease in it.
- The stabilizer is designed for a defined load current; therefore the initial ,
magnitude of the controlling voltage~for a rated load cur.rent is given.
On variation of the load current, for ~xample, when it decreases, the
- voltage drop on the resistor R2 3ecreases, which leads to an increase in -
the controlling voltage. With an increase in the load current, the emitter
current of T1 (or, what a~ounts to the same thing, the base current of T2)
increases, and the resistance of TZ decreases. As a result the load current
assumes the previous value. In the case of an increase in load current
_ the magnitude of the controlling voltage and the emitter current of T1
decrease, and the resistance of T2 increases, lowering the magnitude of -
the current in the load to the initial value.
Thus, the current flowing thr�ough the resistor RZ is kept invariant and
- equal to the rated value. The rated load current is established by the
resistor R2. -
The electric power supply circuit of the SGO bay does not differ theoret-
, ically from the power supply circuit of the SIG bay, but it contains two
groups of stabilized feed voltages, each of which is designed for a load _
current of 0.5 amps with a stabilization voltage of 2f volts. This
voltage is obtained for three series-included D815V stabilitrons. The
stabilizer analogous to the one installed in the f eed plate of the SIG
bay is used as the extinguishing resistance and the load current stabilizer.
In the remote electric power circuit of the intermediate repeater station
(Fig 7.20) the f eed circuits of the up~er and lower repeater stations
are connected to different leads of the phantom circuit. Three parametric
voltage stabilizers eacr., forming three independent groups of feed
102
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
. .
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
voltages, are connected in aeries to each lead. The group with a voltage
of 22 volts (the.stabilitrons D1 D2, type D816A) is deaigned to feed the
= control channel receiver PKK. The other two groups each with a voltage
of 18 vo1~s (the stabilitrons DZ-D5, type D815V), feed the repeatera of ~
the upper and lower frequency groups of corresponding repeater etations
separately. The capacitors C3-C6 are the decoupling elements eYcluding
crosstalk between the repeaters. The elements Drl, Cl; Dr2, C2; Dr3, C~;
Dr4, Cg form the half-sectiona of the low-frequency f iltera realizing
- additional filtratian of interference in the �eed circuit.
. ~ � ~ 5J3 ~l~
(~6) ~ iC~ss
~ ~9, ~~~~r
eue , ~5)
_ K, ,~p, 4.~`anCnar;!r:r I h.
" ~ z,,~ d~ r n~ j AA~
f _
_ 1 �3'"~c, c. ~ ~7 )
� 4, c, . ~ _
~ R~ n8
y �3
- ~2. r n6 ~,s ~,s Cd (14> -
h2 ~ ~ ,UP; Kc
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1
QvZ ~E8~ y s~~ '~s n4~ama~i~re
- 'R yc';BYC ?7B uWneu (13~
r.yc ,~4~4 r,rK a~+s,mu~u
. . _ (lp)
- ~Figure 7.20. Feed circuit of an intermediate repeater station
Key:
1. 60 volts 9. GUs; Ws
2. GUs; Ws 10. 60 volts
3� P~~ 11. 22 volts.
= 4. ~us i2. PKK -
5. Upper repeater feed 13. Lower repeater feed
6. Drl 14. Dr4
7. Dr3 -
8. 18 volts
The remote feed of the repeaters is through the midpoints of the line
transformers of the multipl~xed high--frequency cable pairs. The feed,
as a rule, is organized by the "pair-pair" syatem. The feed by the "pair-
ground" system is permitted only in an emergency, for as a result of
significant potential clifference between the ground pointa, stabilization -
of the feed voltages at the intermediate repeater stationa ia complicated. -
_ When organizing the remote feed the terminals K1-K4 of the feed plate are
connected through the f iltera D-8 to the midpoints of the line transformers
_ (see Fig 7.3). The 320 volt DC voltage received from the 60 volt atation
_ battery using the transistorized current converters is used as Che feed
voltage source. With this voltage the remote feed system organized from
the two terminal statione can feed up to SNUP, that is, 10 repeater
. 103
= FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
' stations. In this case in the middle NUP the II2 and II3 jumpers are tak~n _
off, and the contacts 1-1 and 2-2 of the jumpers II2 and 1I3 are connected.
It is also possible to take off the jumpers II1 and II4 and connect their _
contacts 1-1 and 2-2. In botiz cases each of the terminal offices feeds
five repeater stations.
If the number of NUP does not exceed two, then the feed is organized onl;~
from one of the terminal offices. For this purpose, at the terminal
~ ~ffice opposite to the f eed a loop is made, that is, the terminals K3 and
K4 are connected if the f eed is from ofrice A(the lef t) and the terminals
- K1 and K2 from off ice B(the right). The second terminal off ice remains
in reserve in this case. -
The renote feed system of the KAMA equipment provides for the possibility
of determining the damaged section when a feed circuit breaks. For this
purpose there is a D~, R1 circuit installed using the jumpers n5, II6 on _
each NUP from the feed office side. In the operating remote feed mode the
diode D~ (D226) is connected opposite to the feed voltage and has no -
effect on the operation of the plate. LJhen ,a section of ~.he feed circuit
is damaged, the feeding terminal offices change the polarity of the feed
_ voltage. In this case the diode in the iWP is included in the direct _
routing and by the magnitude of the remote feed current it is possible
approximately to determine the location of the damage on the line.
With local feed the required gradations of feed voltages in each of the
repeating stations are obtained directly from the 60 volt station battery -
by including the extinguishing resistances in series with the load.
Test Que~tions
1. What is the purpose and the basic dif�erences of the KAMA equipment ~
from the KP.R-M equipment?
- 2. What modules enter into the terminal and intermediate station equipment? !
3. ~xplain the current transmission and purp~se of the assemblies of the _
transmitting and receiving ct.annels of the terminal off ices A and B.
4. Explain the structural diagram and purpose of the assemblies of the
- ~ inCermediate repeater station.
5. How do the ALC and the GCM operate at the terminal and intermediate
- stations? ~
6. Explain the nurpose, technical specifications and the schematic -
peculiarities of the group and auxiliary repeaters.
- 7. List the structural characteristics of the channel transmitter and
- explain its qperation.
104
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
Y,IY~U �.7lGU ~!lii..~l x x~ �x~, ~a
~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02148: CIA-RDP82-44850R000200054460-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
8. Do the same for thE chamel receiver.
~ j 9. Explain the functional diagram of the generating equipment.
- 10. What are the structural characteriatics and operating principlES of
_ the generating equipment modulea?
_ 11. How are the redundancy and the switching of the generating equipment
modules accomplished?
12. How is the electric power supply set up for the terminal officea and
_ the intermediate repeater stations?
105
FOR OFFIC~AL USE ONLY -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
I
L Vl\ VJ L iV iLW ~IV~ ~..r~
CHAPTER 8. USE OF PULSE-CODE MODULATION IN t4ULTIPLEXING ~QUIPMENT
8.1. Structural Characteristics of the PCM-TS Coupling Systems
A significant disadvantage of the multiplexing equipment constructed by ~he
principle of frequency division of the signals is the fact that for
~ effect ive use of it in the city telephone service it is necESSary to lay a
special cable with styroflex insulation of the MKS type conductors. In
addition, in the telephone networks of large cities there are a large number
of previously laid cables with paper insulation which have not been multi- _
- plexed at the present time. The KRR equipment is ineff iciently used in
- such cables as a result of the low crosstalk attenuation between the pairs
- on the frequencie;.~ of the line spectrum of th3s equipment. In order to -
fall within the norm with respect to cxosstalk attenuation, the length of
the r epeater section on low-f requency cables must be limited to 3-5 km =
and, in addition, the pairs suitable for multiplexing must be carefully
selected. It is expedient to multiplex such cables using the IICM-VD
[PCM-T5J equipment, the basis for the construction of which is the pulse-
code modulation method and time st~aring of the channels. -
_ As is obvious, any type of information is trarismitted over the line by
= electrical signals which constitute some amount of, for example, current ~
or voltage which varies in tirie according to a defined law. With respect
- to their nature the signals can be analog and digital. An example of an
analog signa.l (Fig 8.1a) is a voice signal in which the voltage or current
- varies eontinuously in accordance [original text discontinued at this
point].
- ------r- � .
- al 1 , b~ j~
~
r r
~
- Figure 8.1. Analog and digital signals
106
FOR OFFYCIAL USE ONLY ~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
, FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
CHAFTER 9. RELAY ASSIItiiBLIES OF MULTIFLEXED TRUNKS .
9.1. General Tnformation
The relay assemblies of multiplexed trunks together with the differential
systems are an intermediate matching circuit which is included between the
office devicea of the automatic off ice and the low-frequency t~rminals of
the channel formed by the KRR equipment. The assemblies are distinguished -
- with respect to structural design and circuitry depending on where the
multiplexing equipment is installed: betWeen the automatic office or between
the automatic and long distance officea and also depending on the automati;c
- office system: 10-step or crossbar. In addition, assemblies installed on
the outgoing or incoming sides of the channel are distinguished.
The ralay assemblies are executed in the form of removable plates on separate
fr~~nes making up the equipment of. the terminal. offices. The raumber of
- assemblies installed on one frame is 20 for the 10- step system (ATS-DSh)
- and 30 for the crossbar system (~TSK). A signal plate is also installed
on the framryo The station conductors are connected to the ass~mb?.ies on
the f rar~es .
The kSLU [multiplex trunk relay] assemblies are connected to the multiplexing
channel equipment by the differential systeme DS executed from resistors.
The differen*_ial systems provide for the transition from the two-wire low-
- frequency channel to the four-wire channel of the KRR equ~pment. -
The relay assembly is used to control the operation of the signal channel.
In the corresponding connection phases, when th~ interaction signals must -
be transmitted over the high-frequency channel, defined relays of the
assembly close the positive feed circuit of the battery with r~spect to the
= signal conductor of the relay assembly to the atatic relay of the channel.
_ The static relay opens and transmits the signal current to the channel.
_ In this case the duration and also the nature of arrival of the eignal
' frequency in the channel correspond to this duration and nature of the
- g~sitive f eed through the relay con.*.acts. For example, when dialing a -
number the signal frequency goes in the form of pulseR repeating the pulsa-
tion of the positive feed on the si~nal line. At other connection times
the signal frequency goes continuously or is absent in general. -
~
107 -
= FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02148: CIA-RDP82-00850R040240050060-8
rVn Vrrt~icu. u~u vra~~
C
- On the receiving end of the channel, after demodulation and amplification, -
the signal frequency goes to the control signal receiver PSU where it is
. converted Co a direct current and controls th~ operation of the relay K of _
the outgoing assembly or the relay RZ of the incoming assembly. These
- relays, in turn, aujust the circui~s of the assemblies so that the direct -
current sendings reach the devices of the opposite automatic office exactly
as the analogous signals were transmitted from the opposite auto~natic office. _
When studying the circuitry of the RSLU assemblies it is recommended that
the following principles be considered.
1. Each new connection phase differs from the preceding one by the state _
- of the signal channel, that is, by the absence of a signal frequency, .
_ pulsation or continuous arrival of the signal frequency. There is no
signal frequency in a free, good channel. From the time the channel becomes .
~ busy, the signal frequency sendings st~rt, wl~ich become pulsating when the
number is dialed. These sendings stop during a conversation. When either ~
subscriber sends a ring-off, the signal frequency sendings are renewed to
~ transmit the ring-off signal to the opposite off ice and initialize the
- assembly circuits.
- 2. The transmission of the signal frequency in one direction causes
transmission of it in the opposite direction. The analogous situation ~
occurs when iC stops.
3. The interaction signals, on being transmitted over the signal channel, ~
change the polarity on the speaking lines of the outgoing or incoming
RSLU assemblv. Then these signals are transmitted to the IGI selector or -
LI connector circuits, creating the speaking, ring-off or other condition
in these circ:uits.
i .
' 4. With positive battery feed to the static relay of the outgoing side of
- the channel the RZ relay in the incoming RSLU assembly responds firs~,
and with positive f eed to the static relay of the incoming side the relay
= K in the outgoing RSLU assembly responds first.
- ; r~-
9.2. RSLU ATS-DSh [10-Step 3ystem Multiplexed Trunk Relay] Assemblies
_ The RSLUI [outgoing RSLU] ar_d RSLW [incoming RSLU] assemblies are
installed on the high-frequency trunks formed by the KRR-M equipment
between the automa.tic off ices of the 10-step system (GATS-47 and GATS-54).
~ .
~ Fig 9.1 shows the structural diagram of the assembly. From the automatic
office devices to the diff erential system of the assembly there are two
wires a and b. From the differential system to the KRR-PZ channel to tY~e M'..
transceiver there are four wires: two for transmission and two for -
reception. The tl~ird wire c is connected directly to the relay assembly ~
connected to the multiplexing equipment by two wires. The signal frequency _
_ feed through the static relay SR to the channel is controlled by one of
108 ~
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
_ these wires, and the reception of the DC aendinga from the signal channel
- receiver PSK to the relay K(RZ) of the RSLU assembly is controlled by ~
the other.
The schematic d~iagrame of the aesemblies are preaented in Figurea 9.2 and
- 9.3. In addition to the relay asaembly and the differential system, each
- circuit includes three attenuators: Udll aad Ud12 0.35 decibels (0.4 nepera); ~
TJdlg 0.17 decibels (0.2 n~epera) and two diodes. Uaing the attenuators,
the required signal level i~ created in the channel and the diodea in~luded
opposite to each other play the role of the aigaal amplitude limiter, the
_ operating principle of which can be explained by Fig 9.4. Two g~apha are
combined in the ~igure: 1) dependence of the re~istance R of the diode on
- the voltage applied to it and 2) variati~n of the voltage in the~'time t.
_ As is obvious from the f igure, the higher the voltage ia witt~ reepect to
magnitude, the less the diode reaistance. Therefore when the signal ~
voltage is ama.ll (curve ul), the resistance of the diodes is large (points
1-1), anci they do not shunt the tal1~ channel. When the signal voltage
corresponds to the curve u2, the diode resistance decreases aharply (points
_ 2-2), and a large current b�ranches :hrough them. Thia limits the magnitude
of the current coming into the channel, and destruction of the transceiver
level diagram is pr~ented. ~ -
~ ~ ~ f~d~eK~y ~1~~ .
~2~ ~ CP (g~ '
_ ~ llopedayc
~ 6 Q pc~y .4C ~3~ ~ �
~,L~ . -
_ ~I (5) (6)M
~ ncn ~
= Pcn-,4c (4~) ;
- Figure 9.1. Structural diagram of the RSLU assembly
Key: ~
1. To the automat~c off ice ~
2. RSLU assembly
3. DS -
- 4. RSL-DS '
5. PSK -
6. Reception ~
- 7. Transmission
8. SR
: 9. G
_ i0. f=3.8 kilohe~tz
The attenuations introduced by the RSLU assemblies into the S00 hertz
_ channel are equal to 13 decibels (1.5 nepera) in the tranamiasion
direction (from point pl-p2 to pointe p~, p8) and 7.8 decibels (0.9 nepera)
' in.the reception direction (from points pg, pl~ to points pl, p2)�
109
_ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLy
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL TISE ~NLY
Purpose of the Outgoing Assembly Relay. 0-- ring-off relay responds
~ wh~n the assembly is busy, holds for the entire time of the conversation
- and is released after the two-way ring-off;
- I-- the pulse relay receives the dial pulses from the GI [selector] r
_ circuit and transmits them to the high-.frequency channel;
S-- series relay responds on arrival at the first dial pulse and holds
_ for the entire series of pulses, disconnects the separating capacitors
Cg and Cg from the pulse circuit, excluding their eff e~t on the operation -
of the pulse relay; '
K-- control reZay is included in the collecfior circuit of the output
stage o� the PSU and operates, receiving the control signals from the
_ multiplexing equipment; -
B-- auxiliary relay to the relay K;
RO when the assembly is busy it responds following the relay 0 and j
- insures more reliable operation of the relay K to the completion of the ,
establishment of the connection. For the time of the conversation it
connects the resistor R7-1500 parallel to the relay K, eliminating the
p~ssibility of its we~ring out during the conversation and insuring its
slow tripping at th~, end of the conversation;
a OS relay for completion of establishment of connection responds when
the called eubscriber answers and holds for the entire conversation. It
is released after two-way ring-off. Before the called subscriber anawers -
- it shunts the transmitting talk channel of the high-frequency channel,
preventing the occurrence of generation in the unloaded channel on the
subscriber line and telephone and protecting the channel irom powerful
_ pulses arising at the input of the differential system from charging and
_ discharging of the separating capacitors during transmission of the number
dialing pulses;
~ PK the cha.nnel damage relay provides for sending a"busy" signal to
' the sub~criber when the channel fails and switches on the office signal;
SV interaction signal relay responds on ring-off both from the
= calling party's side and from the called subscrib~r's side. ,
i
_ Purpose of the incoming assembly relays. The RZ the busy relay is ~
included in the collector circuit of the output transistor of the PSU
= and operates, on receiving control signals from the KRR equipment. It ~
receives and transmits basy ~ignals, dial pulses and all the interaction _
signals between IGI selector and LI connector in all steps of esCablishing
= a connection and ring-off;
i
~ i
_ iio
FOR OFFICIAL USE,ONLY
-
,
. .
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~
_ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
- a _ ~ i~
v ' ~ ~ ~i.~i a~i
enNar+ruvuufi ad.~w~dnuua ~y a
^ tA ctl F~+ w
~ Y~ D+ Cl O 0J O
..~c N~~ ryw ~ c, a�~~ c? N tA p, p u ~
~-I O 0J rl
. ~ _
~ ~ 1~.~ ,G H q c~d I
'r O ~ ~ � t'0 rl O cd 00
� ~ a' ~ ~ iri CJ W J~ Cl aQ
~ N ~ 4 a C~" t~~ ~ ~ ~ I ~-1 'L! R7 �ri ~ � ~
t
� ~ p~n~ a~~ u
~ �a~ i~~~~v
_ ~ Q c A ~ ~ I r-I y 41 4! q _
~ ,A ~ ~ G vua H ~?~d I p r~ c,y~d u _
y, ~ ~ I 3 m _
~ _ b�"' ~ n ,R ~ ~ I y~0 rNl ~ -
. v g,
_ . ~ ~ ~ ~ � ~ 1 ~ Li~' vT ~ ~ b Ft O O 1
. ~o ~ z~~oaw~3
I ~7 p
^ ~ ~ i iN�~..a
~,~i , I I q ~ I R~i ~
3 ~ r-I C! ~ L~+ j� w p. Gl 00
a ~
N ' ~ ~ I ~ ~ ' ca,,d ~a! w ~ ~
� ~ ~ b I ~ C! i-~pI ~ ~ ~ ~J ~i W ~
~ . $ O N QO `~.7 a a ~d .G ~r~l
_ Vo 4-I hi C! O r-I JJ
s I N I I~ U G1 Q~
�~~r.~ ~ gC3 c ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 , p n ~ ~ ~ 1 ral �rj H W .C
Q O ~
' ~ ~ ~i N '~`~~~e ~ ti y ~ Q ~t q ~ ~ ~ i CS O' 'L7 G!
~,v ~ a ~ N .7 ~ ~ 1 ~ ~ G~1
- c a`~ t~ u1 I UJ d0 ~ 4-1 a 4-1
~ Y rs y ~ n fi Q h ' ~ ~O H ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ . .
V � vs � ~ �d ~C i' ~ E"~ ~p y~ � ^ A . '4" '?7
~~Xf a~~ 4 ~ h v b~=P.i C:I r-1 �w ~rl Gl T! O JJ (?/-1~
- ~ V F! ~ w~ O Cn ~ N Gu) f3i J~J i~.l p
. p~ Si G3t~7,. Q'13'~' a., a~ ~b v~ ~ ~1' r-i ~~1 N H 1"~ P4
~ ~ N � ~ t~ ?y ~ ~ ~ o ~n ~ ~ a u ~
- � ' 4 ~ a c~ ~ v) .
. ~ � s~'~ ~ Y.+ z~'' � R ~ o ei ~ a "-I H~ c~1 ~ O O C!
� a,~+ ~ � ?+~3 Z ' `!~'~''wE~i~~ ~ ~ ~ I Cl V la FI O
' Q ~ ~ h o ~ ~ ' ~ ~ '~'v~~ acc$ ~ O ~ +~J ~ W V -
- ~ n0 ~q~b ~ ~ ~I O fA ( 't~l
~ ~ N ~ C v c p~q ~ cE, ~ O.c7 I~ J~ '
N O ~ti , ~ ~ j V ~ ~ 1 N V ~w �w �w ~ ~ .
t
~ ~ H O ~ ~ ~
~ . ~ 3 4~ r~~_c k ~ ~ ~ a ~ ~ y a
. ~ n o~ ~ I �.~.i `+v ~ p , ~ ~ ~ ~ -
~ ~ H C7 . N � w C! O ~.Oi p -
' b~ N~..~ ~ ~ ~~Q ' ~ 1 RI Cz'~ td O~ Ul
~b� ~ ct r ~ C~ Ia
a,~oor ~ ~ ~b0,-~ia~'a~'a
`"z' d b-~' ~ ~ ^ o ~
'-v `~''~ld 'Lh
~1~ 1l ~ . ~ , .~'i H W ~ 1.+ �n
v . . S 1~~~ H v .
. . ~
� f ~ d v- i r l . w ~ w D,
v
D4
' 111
. FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
_ ~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~ V1\ ~L~ LVL~L V~/L VL\L1
t
~ /1 ~1 �
v v v ~ a -
~ h~'-~ltf 'L3-9Ld~NJd1/11 BoxG oH ~ b a' v~i a~ w ~
0
~ tl ~ ~ ~~~G . ~ ~ ~ ~ a~ ~ w
~ ~ ~ xy q~ y ~ 4i ~ ~ q 4~ Q) ~i b~ ~ (A ~
- C~''~ r' 4�~~e~ 2 t~ n, C b i-~ ~ VI vi 4-1 ~.Li
~ ~ Q ~ ~ ~ zG ~ b ~ ~R~R . O a1 .n .C .C .C ~ ~+-i ,
� o ~ . ~ C ~~a0 Q E r-1 N ~ ~ o
N ~
y' ~ b i I p m o v'~] 'd 'cJ ~ O O~I ~n -
� N~ ~ ~ I ~ n $ A 'rl o
N
i ~n i ~v g a
ci ~ N~~', ~c N ~ H I t- ~ H i--I fa Cl
C o~ I ~ t w s`~~~ = b~,~I ~43 ,N ' d' r~ O N ri 4-I .C ~
_ ~ n tC~ n ~.f K G 1 ~ ' b I w~
L t
d 1~
n ~ ~ ~ ~c+l ~ C!] H R ~-1 1~-i .
~ eyA�"^r r o CZ') ~ I 4~-i H'Cl '
Q~n " . w
1
h V ~
o ~ ~ ~ ~o~~
4 i".. H i.~ Gl G'
;v", : M,~e{~. Qa ~r1 cti G~r!'C~iy
~ h ~y ~ V`).~nAi: Y!~ ~ r"' ~ ~ ~ e+i Fi ~
~1 ~ h v ~ a' 13~ ~ L~i (A O 1~1 J-~ cd
~ ~ ~ w ~ r. � ~ ~ ~ r h O U ~ ~ u ~ 4-I
~ v cQ, ^ ~ u � e c!! I 1 CJ
~i j i-i N rl f: 1-~
- n ~ 4-1 3-~ r-1 ~ a N r~l L~.~
- O V
- ~ Q) b� w � w jJ (A
N ~ a N o~ , .~C~H~TH
v ti ~
- c, ~ �o I ~I ca D a ~ ~ .
�o ~ ~ o ~ � ~ ~ ^ ` ~ 00 I H H O -
- ~ o ~ n H St ~ a ~ �j ~ ~ ~ ~ M ~ ~ H O ~
, : ~.,r~ 0 ~ ~p6 � ~ t N ~a ,a ~ ~ i ~ a w o
~ ~
- ~ v~ ~w ta~' ~ R ~i ~ ~~rl I H q4 I 4~-~
- fi x a~ u i~ s~
_ d~ ~~�..a � Q Q~ o~ a~aca~~~~
~ ~ ~ ~ ~�~3 ~ . e
`~"i ~ d ~ O ~ ri Z w O ~ o~o
v~` ~ ~~N^ t~v� ` G ~ N t~~ C7 ~ q
G~~~~ h ~ ~ b~ ~ P4 F+ ~ r~l N '
a Q . ,o Fa W V~ O J-i
v C~. Q~~ .1'ti " cr1 X�~ H v 0u) 1~.~ ~
C~ 4 4) f-I I 41 fA N Cl
~
- v , � ~ s. � ~ ~�nv~i a~+~+
ti h
v ou ~v ~u ~ , o ~ ~ �NC~.~ ~ ;
~ a ~ .~1 '
ii ^ ~ Ol R! CZ'~ H~".. 3 i~~i
~ a �
a, ~ n` g vm ~ v ~ r-1 H~ C~i N !
y^d y'� ~f 4 d^ N a* � a r-1 W H CS O m
H~H N v
ellll3NtllGUll~! ad~lUlDdO!!UD J/ c~C ~ M ~ '
- v I 1 I ~ ~~i ~ ~
~d Gl �rl O 1.~ O ~ ~
,
. N
r~i -
11G
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
~
.
~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
R
I 1
. ~
I ~ . -
2 I ~ ?
~ F I ~ ~ ~v
- ~ I I ~Y
I I _
.
I
~ I.
- . I I ~ ~ , -
, Z
- Figure 9.4. Explanation of the pr~.nciple of limiting the
current amplitude
N is the auxiliary relay for the RZ relay wtiich responds at the time the
assembly becomes busy and holds until the called subscriber answers;
_ P-- the test relay responds when the assembly is busy and holds until
ring�off;
KI the pulse relay of the pulse corrector;
KS the series relay of the pulse corre~tor; _
SA the signal relay of the line a-- receives the signal from the LI
[connector] circuit that ~he subscriber has answered, holds the armature _
_ ,for the entire time of the com~ersation, tranemits the ring-off signal of -
the called subscriber when he hanga up the phone last; _
VSA auxiliary relay for the SA;
SB signal relap of line b~- controls the pr~s~nce and the state of -
repair of the II/IVGI selector equipment over line c at the output of the
_ incoming RSLU assembly. It receives the ring-off signal over line b from
the LI circuit and transmits it in the direction of the outgoing automatic
office when the called subscriber hangs up the phone first.
InitiaZ State of the Aseemblies. When the KRR-M equipment channel is
in a state of good sepair and II/IVGI selector in the incoming automatic
office is also in good repair and is in the initial atate, no relay is
operating in the outgoing RSLU assembly, the positive feed of the battery
_ .is n~t fed over the signal line pll to the stat3c relay and, consequently,
the signal frequency current is not transmitted in the direction of the
incoming automatic off ice. -
In the inco~ing assembly the relay SB is under current which receivee the
- negative feed from the b~ttery from the II/IVGI selector circuit over
line b. The contact 12-13 of the relay SB breaks the signal conductor P11
as a result of which the positive feed is picked up from the standard -
relay, and the signal frequency current is not transmitted in the direction
of the outgoing office.
113 � -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
a V~� VL~ t~Il~~y V?L V~~La ~
If the II/IVGI selector in the incoming automatic office is damaged or -
removed, then the Sn relay trips the armature and closes the positive
= feed circuit to the static relay of the incoming side of the channel.
The signal frequency current is transmitted over the high-frequency
channel of the KF~R equipment in the direction of the outgoing automatic
office, and in the RSLUI assembly the relay K responds according to the
following circuit:
1. The 60 volt negative terminal; the conductor p5; the contact 1-5 of
- the relay K; the springs 1-2 of the test socket Gn3; the wire p6; the
. collector of the output ransistor of the PSU; the ~unctions: collector-
base and base-emitter; the 60 volt positive terminal.
- 1'he relay B responds according to the following circuit following the -
relay K: -
2. Positive terminal; con.tact 14-15 of the relay K; winding 1-2 of the
relay B; negative terminal.
- The possibility of a busq outgoing assembly is prevented by the contact
13-I4 of the relay B, and the contact 11-12 closes the circuit for burning ~
the tube AS of the frame and the individual tube of the assembly. By the ~
' signal received the service personnel of the outgoing automatic station
communicate the presence of damage to the incoming automatic station.
Assembly Busy. When the RSLUI assembly is busy on the GI side the relay 0
responds overthe wire c by the following circuit:
3. The positive terminal from the GI circuit through the winding of the =
test relay; wire c; winding 4-3 of the relay 0; contact 33-32 of the
- relay 0; aprings 2-1 of the blocking button BKn; contact 32-31 of the
relay PK; contact 14-13 of the relay B, resistor R2-200, negative terminal.
The relay 0, responding,is blocked by its contact 33-31; the contact 14-15 -
closes the positive feed circuit to the static relay as a result of which ~
the signal frequency current goes to the channel transmitter. In the
transmitter the signal frequency modulates the carrier frequency of the
channel, and in the form of the sideband it passes through the group
equipment of the transmitting channel of the outgoing automatic station, �
then along the line, the group equipment of the receiving channel of the
= incoming automatic station, it is demodulated in the channel receiver and
forces response of the relay RZ in the incoming RSLU assembly. The purpose
of operation of the RZ relay is analogous to circuit 1 for operation of
the relay K in the outgoing assembly. -
The relay RZ, responding, creates by the contact 54-55 the operating .
circuit of the test relay II
114
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
411
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
_
,
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
4. Positive terminal; winding 1-5 of the relay II; contact 55-54 of the
relay RZ, wire c, II/IVGT aelector; relay 0 in the II/IVGI aelector;
negative terminal. _
The relay SB tripa ita armature. The auxiliary relay H responda to the -
_ contact 11-12 of the relay RZ: _
5. Positive terminal; contact 12-11 of relay RZ; windinga 1-2 and 2-3 of
relay H; negatiue terminal. ~
The relay H bloclss the operating circuit of the relay P by the contact
51-52. This relay continuea to hold ita armature independently of the
contacts of the RZ relay, and by the contact 31-32 shunte iXs low-
resistance winding 1-2 and ~iecomes delayed for releasing. Through the
- quiescent contacts 12-13 of the relay SB and 31-32 of the relay SA the
_ positive feed goes to static relay, and the signal freq~ency is trans-
mitted in the direction of the outgoing automatic office.
In the RSLUI asaembly the relay K reaponds, then the relay B. The contact
_ 14-13 of the relay B breaka the wire c, by which the busy state of the ~
given assembl~ is noted. In the outgoing asaembly the relay RO also
, responda b~ the following circuit: �
6. Positive feed; contact 12--1~ of the relay 0; contact 11-12 of the
relay OS; winding 5-1 of the relay R0; negative terminal. _
By the contact 33-34 tt~e relay RO disconnects the resistor R~-1500 from -
the winding of the relay K, insuring more reliable operation of it for
the time that the assembly is bursy. Thus, a circular check takes place _
when the good channel is busy. If the high frequency channel has faile3,
then the signal frequency current does not go in the forward direction,
- and, consequently, also in the return dire~ctio~ or only in the return -
direction, and the relays K and B in the RSLUI assembly do not respond.
When the first pulse of the number dialed by the subscriber arrives, the
relay I responds over the following circuits:
7. Positive feed from IGI selector; wire a; contact 33-34 of the relay OS;
winding 3-4 of the relay I; negative feed. ~
8. Negative feed from the IGI; wire b; contact 14-13 of the relay OS;
winding 2-1 of the relay I, positive.
The contact 33-31 of rhe r;:lay I closes the operating circuit of the relay
S.
- 9. Positive; contact 12-11 of the relay 0; 11-12 of relay OS; 31-33 of
_ relay I; windings~l-2 and 2-3 of relay S; negative.
_
115
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY �
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
~vL~ vl~ayy~W V?u V~~La
Through the operating contact of the relay S and the quiescent contact of -
the relay V the relay PK responds in the circuit 10.
10. Positive; contacts 12-11 of relay S; 43-54 of the relay V; winding
5-1 of the relay PK, negative.
After completion of dialing the first digit of the number the relay S-
_ releases, but the relay PK continues to hold its armature, for, responding,
it was blocked by its contact 11-12, receiving the positive through the
closed springs 3-2 of the SB button. The contactis 14-15 and 54-55 of the ~
re7..ay PK closes the feed circuit of the "busy" signal aZong the wires a -
and b in the direction of the calling subscriber, and the contact 51-52 of -
this relay closes the signal light circuit of AS: ;~i
1. Positive; contact 52-51 of the relay PK; 31-32 of the relay S; and in
~ parallel the resistor R16-1000; then negative through the springs of the ;
button BL and the signal plate of the frame.
The subscriber, hearing the "busy" signal hangs up the phone. In the
- RSLUI assembly the relay 0 releases, and the relay PK remains under
= current.
The contact 31-32 of the relay PK opens the line c in the direction of IGI,
- by which the assembly is blocked from busy. In order to remove the block
after eliminating the damag~e, the service personnel must press the button ~
SB. Then the relay PK releases. The signal AS is extinguished, and the
RSLU assembly is ready for the new busy, that is, the initial state of the
assemblies is restored.
When the good channel is busy, in the RSLUI the relays 0, R0; K, V are
under current, and in the RSLUV, the relays RZ, N, P.
- Dialing a Number. When dialing a number from the pulses relayed from IGI,
in the outgoing assembly the relay I pulsates (circuit 7 and 8). The
contact 53-54 of the relay I periodically breaks the sending of the signal '
frequency to the high-frequency channel, and the dial pulses are transmitted ~
= to the incoming assembly.
With the first dial pulse in the outgoing assemb,ly with res~ect to circuit
9 the relay S responds. The contacts 33-34 and 53-54 disconnect the
separating capacitors Cg, C9 from the pulse relay at the time of dialing -
so that distortions are not introduced into operation. The contacts 13-14
and 34-35 of the relay S connect the resistors R4 and R5 to these .
capacitors. The capacitors are discharged through the resistors. This
prevents false operation of the pulse relay after completion of relaying
the pulses. On completion of the series the relay S is released. _
In the incoming assembly in the cycle with the incoming pulses the relay
RZ pulsates, where when the current pulse appears in the relay I and its
contact 53-54 is open, the signal frequency sending to the incoming _
116
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
- . ~ . .
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY ~
auComatic office is broken. At this time, there ia no pulae in the RZ -
relay, and it releasea. Thus, the pulsea received turn out to be
inverted. ~
Since the pulae duration tPulae is made up of the closing time t~ and the
opening time ta of the pulse circuit which are different (with a puls~
coefficient Kpulse 1.6, to is greater than t~ by 1.6 times), then in the
incoming assembly the ratio of to and t~ is disturbed with respect to the
outgoing assembly. For correction of the pulses, a pulae carrector fa
introduced into the incoming assembly circuit. This corrector ia made up
of a capacitor C6 with a capacitance of 8 microfarads, relays KI, KS and
reaistors. The operation of the corrector can be explained according to
Figures 9.5 and 9.6 in which'the basic electrical circuits characterizing .
- the correction process and the time diagrams of the operation of the
corrector are presented.
Let the subscriber dial the number 2. On first response of the relay I
in the outgoing RSLUI relay assembly (Fig 9.5a and 9.ba) the contacts of -
relay I break the signa line to the high-frequency channel, as a`result
of which the relay RZ releases in the incoming RSLW assembly (F~.gurea
9.5b and 9.6b). The capacitor C6 (Fig 9.Sc) is discharged through the
_ contact 13-14 of the relay RZ by the following circuit:
12. Positive; capacitor C6; contacts 12-13 of the relay P; 14-13 of the -
- relay RZ; 51-52 -of the relay KI; resistor KI-250; negative.
Q~ . C4 ~
~ + ~ t
' N 93~? 9J0 ~ Q~ i ~
(1) o ~ OC s (4) ~ (5) .
- ~3)
' B~~(b) (7)(8) (9) c) (I1) (12) (13) (14) .
� nK Oc a CB .�o ` ~s " Af ~u lfN-tS0
* ~
f~~~~L/'~;n.- + o-~ I / I ! - 2 ~ -
4 !S Il 17 pll
(10) Xcmampene _
a~ Cs n ps R-500 ~l1fN ~~15~ ~16~
~ Bca c6
� * ; J3 3'1 J? + ,
~ f p .
� .re~ ~13~ XC8~ . f) ~13 R -SO0 o~
Ku
I l3 h ,z-,`>> ~ '7 r ~ ~ I ~ ~ o .
~ fd 1 ~
~ 8)~ RJ S~D r
. /f/ K" C..~~~ C ll
~o (17)
,~~�~a , ,
Figure 9.5. Explanation of operation of the number dialing pulae
Key: correct~r
1-- From the devices of the outgoing automatic office; 2-- I;
3-- OS; 4-- DS; 5-- to the high-frequency channel; 6-- PK;
7-- OS; 8-- I; 9- SV; 10 to the static relay; 11 P; 12 RZ; -
13 ICI; 14 KI-250; 15 Vsa; 16 SB; 17 to the incoming
automatic office devices; 18 KS
FOR OFFICIAL~USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
_ ~
a~
_ ct 1 ~ ~ ~ i ~ I
i ~
~1) % j-!
b~ p3 G.MC ~6~ -
~2~ ~
: j/%~~
j%.
, ~ . ~ _ , i
- c~ K;.~ Jr,o-~rs ' ' ~ l., atc
~ (3) I
~
L,,v.c ~
d ~ ltC i -
(.4) , . ~ .
/lncs~A~ra --160 TO l. Mc ~ 6~ ~
- rs,~nq~erD9 ' _
(5) 7~TC~x
~ J I ~~Z ~~'J ~ dy MC
Figure 9.6. Time diagrams of the corrector
Key:
1. I
2. RZ �
3. KI
4. KS ~
= 5. Sending dial pulses to the automatic office input _
6. t, milliseconds ~ .
During subsequent releasing the relay I, the relay RZ cesponds and by
its contacts creates the dischar~e circuit of the capacitor through the
relay winding KI (Fig 9.Se). The relay KI responds (Fig ~.6c) and by its -
contacts creates the ogerating circuit of the relay KS (Fig 9.5e) which,
responding, holds during the entire pulse series (Fig 9.6d).
On repeated response of the relay I in the RSLUI, the relay RZ in the
RSLUV releases a second time, and again the capacitor discharges. The
relay KS continues to hold through the quiescent contacts 31-32 of the
relay RZ. Until the relay RZ is deenergized (tl-t2) the first dial pulse
is transmitted in the direction of the incoming automatic office by the j
- circuits presented in Fig 9.5 � and.g. ~
~
Thus, the sending of the first pulse to the incoming automatic office
(Fig 9.6e) takes place only after the second releasing of the relay RZ. i
After repeated r elease of the relay I and response of the relay RZ the
capacitor C6 again discharges through the winding KI which, on responding, _
- again cuts off the sending of the first pulse in the direction of the
incoming automatic office. Here the relay KS continues to hold its arma-
ture through the operating contact 12-13 of the relay KI. After discharge -
_ of the capacitor (tg) the relays KI and KS are released. During the delayed _
releasing of the relay KS to the time t4 the second dial pulse is trans-
mitted through the quiescent contacts of the relays KI and KS. Thus,
the sending of the last pulse of each dial series depends on the release
time of the relay KS which is regulated by the resistor R6 and must be
within the limits of 60-70 milliseconds.
~ 118
FOR OFE~~~I,; ;uSEV QNILY. _ . .
- ~
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
Subscriber Answers. When the called subscriber anawers, the poles o� the
line a switch in the LI connectar, for which instead of the negative, the _
= positive feed of the battery starts, and the insulation of the line b
takes place from which the polarity is picked up. With this polarity on
the subscriber lines in the RSLW asaembly the relay ~A responds by the
circuit :
17. Positive along the line a from LI; contacta 12-11 of relay KS; ,
31-32 of relay SA; winding 5--4 of relay SA; contact 11-13 of relay N;
windings 2-1 of relay SA; negative.
The relay SA, responding, continues to hold the armature in the local
circuit:
18. Positive; contact 32-31 of relay VSA; 31-33 of relay SA; winding 5-4
of relay SA} contact 11-13 of relay N; winding 2-1 of relay SA; negative.
The contact 53-54 of relay SA breaks the signal conductor and the sending
of the signal frequency to the high-frequency channel stops. In the out-
going assembly the relay K releases and the relay OS responds by the
following circuit:
19. Positive; contact 12-11 of relay 0; 33-32 of relay K; 52-51 of relay S;
52-51 of relay. V; winding 5-4 of relay S; winding 5-4 of relay V; relay OS;
negative.
Relay V continues to hold in the same circuit.
By the contact 51-52 of relay OS, the shunt ie moved from the speaking
channel in the transmission direction. The contacts 14-15 and 34-35 of
the relay OS switch the poles of the line a and insulate the line b in the -
direction of IGI. The contact 54-55 of the relay OS picks up a positive
from the signal wire and stops sending the signal frequency in the direc-
tion of the incoming office. The contact 11-12 of the relay OS breaks
the operating circuit of the relay R0, and it drops. The quiascent contact
33-34 of the relay RO connects the resistor R~ in parallel with the wind-
ing of the relay K. The resistor R~ prevents response of the relay K -
during the conversation.
In the incoming RSLU assembly the relays RZ and N release and the operating
- circuit of the relay VSA is created:
_ 20. Positive; contact 13-14 of relay SA; winding 1-2 of relay VSA;
contact 12-13 of relay N; 32-31 of relay SB; winding 2-1 of relay SA;
negative.
In this circuit the relay VSA responda, and the relay SA continues to -
hold its armature.
~ 119
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
I I
Af ter releasing the relays RZ and N, the test relay P of the assembly and
_ the ring-off relay 0 of II/IVGI are blocked by the contact 51-52 of the
relay SA. Thus, during the conversation in the outgoing assembly the
relays 0, V, OS are held, and in the incoming channel SA, VSA, P.
Ring-off from the Direction of the Calling Subscriber. If the calling
subscriber hangs up the phone f irst, then a negative pulse will be fed to
- the line a from IGI. In the outgoing RSLU assembly the relay SV responds
- by the fQilowing circuit:
= 21. Negative over line a from IGI; contact 34-35 of relay OS; winding 1-2
of relay SV; contact 53-54 of r elay K; positive.
The contact 12-13 of relay SV closes the signal line, and a signal frequency
~is sent in the direction of the incoming automatic off ice. In the incoming
RSLU assembly the RZ relay responds, and after it the relay N. The contacts
13-11 of the relay N and 52-51 of relay VSA connect the thousand-ohm wind-
ing 1-2 of the relay SA with the negative at the end to the line a in the
LI direction. Accordingly, the signal will be transmitted to the LI about
ring-off on the part of the calling subscriber. The contact 33-34 of the
relay N blocks the relay VSA.
- When the called subscriber, having received the "busy" signal from the LI
hangs up the phone, the poles of the lines in the LI reverse in the
- direction of the incoming assembly: line a is insulated, and the ne~ative
will be fed to the line b. For this polarity on the lines in the RSLUV
_ the relay SA releases, and the relay SB responds according to the following
circuit:
23. Positive; winding 3-4 of relay SB, contact 51-52 of relay KS;
51-52 of relay P; line b; negative from the LI.
The contact 13-11 of the relay SB closes the signal line, and the signal
frequency goes in the direction of the outgoing automatic office. In the
RSLUI assembly the relay K responds, and the contact 11-12 connects the
ne,gative to the line b in the.direction of IGI through the winding 4-5 of
the relay Sy; and the contact 53-54 insulates the line a. For this polar-
_ ity on the lines, IGI goes to ring-off and picks up the positive from the
line c in the direction of the outgoing assembly where the relays 0, OS
and SV drop. The signal line is broken, and the sending of the signal
frequency to the incoming automatic office stops. .
In the RSLUV assembly the relays RZ, N and VSA drop. The positive is
picked up from the line c in the direction II/IVGI, and all the devices
of the incoming automatic off ice go to ring-off. The relay P drops, the
relay SB is free of the negative with respect to line b and also drops.
120
FOR O~k'.~.~IA~.;TjJS,~. ,O~X
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY '
After return of II/IVGI to the initial atate the rzlay SB again responda,
receiving the negative over the line c. The contactsl3-11 of the relay
SB and 54-53 of relay P break the current aend.ing of signal frequency to
the channel. In the RSLUI, the relays K and V drop. The RSLUI and the
RSLW assemblies reach zhe initial state.
_ Ring-off from the Direction of the Called Subacriber. If the called sub-
scriber hangs up first, then a pole awitch takes place on the lines in the
GI direction so that the wire a is inaulated, and a negative ia fed to the
line b. In th~ incoming asaembly the relay SB reaponds according to the
following circuit:
24. Negative from LI along the line b; line b in the RSLW assembly; `
the contact 51-52 of the relay KS; winding 4-3 of the relay SB; positiv~. -
The contact 31-32 of the relay SB breaks the operating circuit of the
relay SA which slowly drops. The contact 11-13 of the relay SB closes the
_ signal line in the direction of the high-frequency channel, and the s~.gnal
_ �requency is transmitted to the outgoing automatic office. In the delayed
release time of the relay SA the relay N responds by the following circuit: -
25. Positive; contact 52-53 of relay SB; 11-12 of the relay SA; windings
1-2 and 2-3 of the relay N; negative.
_ The contact 51-52 of the relay N provides for holding the relay P in the
RSLU assembly and the relay 0 in the IIjIVGI with respect to the line c.
The contact 33-34 of the relay N blocks th~ relay VSA.
_ From the sendings of signal freq~}ency in the RSLUI assembly the re?ay K
responds, and the poles of the lines are switched in the IGI direction:
the wire a is insulated, and the negative is fed to the wire b through
the winding 4-5 of the relay SV. The relay SV responds in the circuit
in series with the relay SB to the IGI.
TY~e contact 12-13 of the relay SV closes the signal line and the signal
_ frequency current goes in the direction of the incon;ing automatic office.
In the RSLW assembly the RZ relay responds, and the relay N continues
_ to hold through the contact 51-52 of the relay RZ. The calling subecriber
- receives th~ "busy" signal from the LI circuit and hangs up the phone.
The instruments of the outgoing automatic ~ffice go to ring-off. In the
RSLUI assembly the relays 0, OS, SV release, and the sending of the
signal frequency to the incoming automatic office stops. In the RSLW
_ assembly, the relays RZ, N and VSA are released, the delay circuit of the
_ relay P of the asbembly is disturbed, and the relay 0 in II/IVGI with
respect to the line c. All of the devices of the incoming automatic
_ office go to ring-off, reverse pole switchir.g of the ltnes a and b takes
place in the LI. In the incoming RSLU assembly the relay SB releases,
_ and the signal line in the direction of the multiplexing equipment is -
closed through the quiescent contacta of the relays SA and SB.
121
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02148: CIA-RDP82-00850R040240050060-8
L~vt~ vt�L tl..~caa~ uuL vi~a,i _
= When the II/IVGI inatrument circuit reaches the initial state, again the ,
relay SB responds with respect to the wire c and Ureaks the..signal
frequency sen.c?~ng to the ouCgoirigautomatic office. The relays K and V
release in ~he RSLUI assembly, and the assembly will be ready for a new -
busy. -
9.3. The RSLUM1Relay Assembly -
The RSLUt4I and RSLUMV outgoing and incoming relay assemb~ies are installed
on the t.runks between the automatic offices and the long distance offices. ~
The out~;oing RSLUM assembly is installed between the GI14.and the input of
the high-frequency channel formed by the KRR equipment. The incoming
- RSLUM assembly is installed between the output of the high-frequency
chan~nel of the KRR-M equi.pment and the II/IVGI input of the local automatic _
telephone office. The diagrams of the assemblies are presented in Figures
9.7 3nd 9.8. -
Purpose of the Relays of the Outgoing Assembly. 0-- ring-off relay
responds when the assembly is busy, holds for the entire time of the
conversation and relsases after ring-off in the direction of t~e long
distance telephone office;
I-- the pulse relay receives the number dialing pulses, the call and ~ -
_ cut-off sendings from the GIM circuit and transmits them by a signal
frequency current over the high-frequency channel;
K-- control relay connec':ed to the collector circuit of the output
stage of the PSU, receives the control signal with circular testing of the
- channel, and also the signals for establishing the connection with -
respect to the end of the dialing of the number, the answering and ring-
off of the called subscriber;
V-- auxiliary relay operates when the assembly is busy after receiving
the monitor signal and releases after ring-off from the direction of the
' long-distanc~ office; -
- S-- the series relay responds on the first dial pulse and holds during
_ the Pntire series of pulses. With its contacts it disconnects the
- separating capacitances from the pulse circuits so that~these capacitan~es
- will not distort the shape of rhe pulses. It operates briefly after
establishment of the connection, creating a circuit for response of the =
OS relay;
_ The OS relay is the r~lay for completion of establishment of the connection,
it responds after establishment of the connection to the ~alled subscriber;
1[Translator's note: M in this abbreviation and following abbreviations _
such as GIM refers to the long distance telephone office. Otherwise the
abbreviations mean the same as already defined without the t~i.] -
,
122
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
SV the interaction signal relay responds af ter completion of the _
- establishment of the connection in the case where the called subscriber _
is free;
A-- after relay responds when the called subscriber answers and _..,lds
for the entire time of the conversation until the called subscriber hangs
up the phone;
' PK the channel dama.ge relay responds after the long distance telephone
operator dials the first number if the channel is damaged. =
Purpose of the Incoming Assembly Relays. RZ is the busy relay which
operates on receiving the control signals from the PSU of tha transceiver .
module, it receives the number dialing pulses, the call, cut-off and ring-
- off sendings;
N-- auxiliary relay to RZ relay prepares the operating circuit of the
KI relay; ~
KI pulse relay of the pulse corrector; -
KS ~eries relay of the pulse corzector responds for the first pulse -
' of the KI relay and holds for the entire series of pulses formed by the
corrector;
P-- test relay responds when the assembly is busy and holds until ring-
off from the direction of the long distance office; -
SB signal relay of line b-- receives signals over line b: completion
of establishment of connection, "~ubscriber busy," "subscriber free," _
"subscriber answers," ring-off from the subscriber direction and it trans-
- mits these signa.ls to the high-frequency channel in the GIM direction;
U-- holding relay operates in the initial state of the assembly,
receiving the negative from the GIM circuit over the line c;
SA signal relay of the line a-- receives the signal of completion of
establishment of the connection over line a in tlie case where the subscriber
is free anc~ also the answer and ring-off signals from the subscriber
direction;
OT answer relay operates when th~ called subscriber answers, holds -
for the entire time of the conversation, releases on ring-off both from
_ the subscriber direction and from the telephone operator of the long
distance office.
= Initial State. In the initial state the signal frequency current is not
- transmitted over the channel. When the channel of the KRR equipment is
not busy and the device of the auto~a.tic telephone off ice to which the
_ i23 ~
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
a va\ v~ a yViLlJJ bIUL Vl\LJL
� ~ Q ~
O H
� ~ ri 4l W
- a i ~ ~ a~
o ~ n � o+ a~i � ~ ~
N N ~ i.~ ~-i O~ rl R)
tlANJNU~DIftlB 2dBulDdDUUOA~ ~ ~ v ~ ' O W b0
N S ~ ~
~n o~ 4 ~ J-~ � id b0 ~
Q
N w v o�' c$ o O ~ � d' ~ okv z ~ d 1 ~ i-i ~ 3-~ ~
4 ' ~ I .C cS1 ~rl O
~`~i, o m o U1 I OD O cd G!
- ^S,~ `Y o - o ~ y ~ o r~-I N b~ 1+ ~
~
~v C1 y ~ w, C 4 ~ byAy ~1 ~ Pc~'~ ~ ~ ~~I-I Q~
' P ; C A~ 2 � 1-1 q 00 N+~ 'b Cd
- -0 e~ rl O 00 r-I i-i ~ 1-+
a ~ o ~ d0 o R~ ~ c~o c~i ~n
~ ~ ~ ^ �o b~ ~ � ~ 'O$ ~ u ~ I q I ~ .C Q ~ rl
G a ~ ~ 1 ~ O
, TW n~� ~~i ~`O ~ ~ ~ cepi C T= ~ i.l M�~ ~i' O U a
C " ~ ~ d: ~n � ~ c0 ri U1 O ~7
^ ~ ~ ~ ~ .7 G1 I N
~ ~ h I u1 N� ~ ~'Li tJ I
~ S " e ~ ~h H~~ ~N ~ -
~ ~ ~ ^ Q v ~ d' ' ~ ' ~ 'r.l ^ 4-1
t A e~ w ~ ~ ~ -
� U~
~ b v y ~ ~ y '~i ~ ~.S ~ ~ 1~ ~ ~ ~ F'+ CI F3 ~ _
' o ~ ~ ~t O~ f~ rl I-i .G 'J+
~ N � " ^ � ~ ~ ~ a cn ~ tA al � r-~I a
v yo v" ~s +5 ~ Sto ~C~ E3 H f-~ p~ ~�ri p O C!
- oc ~ ^ o'~ fi ~ h tA N R1 I cd N~ N N~rl
_ N v' " L;�O r' ~�i c.
~ ~ 1 h"' ~i " ~ ~ A cv p, G'' o c~d
y~' N y ~ n I d r-I ~ W.C N
b ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ s:~ I ~ ~a-1 O ~ ~ .b ~ p yC,r
. � oR ~ o ~ c'd N G I G! N -
� c~ o ~ ~"q c~ E~^ b0 C7 e-~ ~ N rl GUl O~ ,0 O
~n 8 ^ ~n ~ � /1 ~ ~ ~'~'I �r+ 'U .G' N 4~i i~ 1~
ti~ ti n O vi d$ h Y v `r'1 dl ?7 G~ ~7-1 R) fA
~ sr ~hti " N E~m f r"~ ~'a b0 1d I O i-i p U~ N p, -
tn^~ o wo = n vd ~et. v~ i~ I 00 V~ N Cl p.
_ Q ~n v+~,a 4 ' v~ ~ ~ ~ O M O M U O O! _
tl
~ ~ ~ s N a ~ 0 t+ v.,~ ` 0 ~.1 00 ~~,.{"'j ~ R~ ~1 i-~
~ I ~ I = a4 ~ tA 4-~ O
~ ~ ~
_ , ~ 1 F3 Y~ ti "v I~ I e-1 r-I I ri 1~
o ~ e ~ cc ~ r1 ~~-I ~O I N tn I
~ ~ e ~ ~ ~ y ~ ~ ~G ~ F. ~ . n y.~{ � w ~ p N }~j ~ ~
"~3 p�' Q ~ i Q a �Co o N ~-I U � ~ N !f1 Gl
- yL,,, o[ 00 ~ C ~ c~,~ E G ~ C7 'Li N d' w~ Jcd 1~I N W
~ N :IJ M1n5 T'f O ~ ~
5 ~ R ~Q ~ � ~ W rl y
Q . ~ ~ ~y ~N ~r, a i a~ o ~
' ~ ^ n O ~ b ~ c�, a ~ N M ~ ~ ,-~i ~ 4-i ~ cd
~ H N_ n a ~b H n cr ~n a u b o~n -
n= o ~ a~ac co . N r-I CJ rs:
~ ~�~t ~ ~ C 1 I CbD � ~ cd cd U G H
c'� ~cVO `ih ~ 4~' b d `J ~ ~ a~ ~ ~ ~ w N ~ ~i~i ~ b0 N ~ ~ 1.+
I o e~a R C
h5-,71F1 Lh-~11! WNJ A r^.~ . Ai G~l ~t~A Cl O czd ~
~ v N N M ~-1 ~-i P~i .C U.~ (A
`'i N ~ ~ r~l I .C ~ I ~ F+
v I I~+ I i-+ .C 1 ~1
I I~-1 1~ F+ Gl
~~o 3N ~ ~ _
D,
- 41
~ �
~ 124 .
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
~ -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
.
0
~~-91d 'Lh-9LH ~~dT/!! BoxD vH
r---- ~
~ 0 . 4N C~ p,w~
~ Q
~
- ~ ~ G �w
� v h ~ � . ~ ~
~ ~
k' {J
N C O
C C o.
~ ~y ~ ',7 N
o ~
~ A ~
~ ~ ~ 1 z ~�p G! C7 -
= G ~
- y~ h ~ , = b 1~
h a~ �G h cd a
~ ~ ~ riH
Y',v 'e ~n C~^ ~n ~ ~ R ~ ` � = i-I
~ ~ y y V~ti ~ ~ ^ - O ~ ~ ~ '
~ b
w ~"'(~q ~ N y ~ 4
L ~ ~ ~
~ ~
-b~ +s q `O Z p ~ h ~ ~ ' ~-I I
'(~v n~' C~i o~, o k~h" ~ ~ t w
t+ p y . n
. O SCf ~ I ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ba ~ ~ P~1
~ " . h ~M h ~ ' ~ ~ ~
,~or h x � ~ ~ iJ 1
b ~
N~ w N h y V n ~ . ~ I~
a ' ~o � n � ~ ''n Ua] G~) � a ~t
a
- " 1,~ o ~ o ~ . ~ ~ {Y.~ u1
�o cc~'p ~ t~ i~+ I
- N o �o o y~` ~ oD c0 a m
o ~ A H
v� Q Z~ ~ ~na ~ ~ y o ' N ~
- , ~ ~ ~ ~ "''L,= ~ o b ~
~
~ ~'R~ ~ ~ I ~t
C V x r H I ~ ~ `
` � ~ ~ h ~ U ~ ~ ~
. . ~ ^Q ~ ~ ""1 ~ ~ N ~ ~ _
. vc z F, ~ ~ rn q~ C~
. C Q 4! N r-I H -
0 0 ~o -
~ o ` ~ ~ ~
' ~ ~ � ~ ~'~H
N o ~
~ ~ w ~ a~ v ~z C b~p ~
~ ~ ~ o U . Gl �r~l ~
~ ~ b o cn a
. v tl ~ r . x ~ ' ~
- ^ o ~o ~ a'' C~+ 1 ~
~ ~ }~C ~ ^ h ' N ul
c~ a ~ ~ ~h~ ~ V h ~ (1. � w ~
~ ~
' a ib p l~ 1~ .
N; ~ ~ ~ ~.a I
a .,-1 ~
~O v~ ~ N N O
N N ~ Q 4 4'~ y~o V ~ C y"~ .f'r 'L1 rl
Q~ Cl +Za Q ~
~ - ~
dnHauu~ouu6 adfirundvuuv ,v ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
_ i ~ i
~ i i -
. ~ ~ rn ~
.
~ -
~ _
125
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
_ wires a, b and c of the incoming assembly are connected, is good and is .
in the initial position, no relay operates in the outgoing assembly, and
in the incoming assembl~~ the relay U operates, receiving the negativ~ from
the II/IVGI circuit over the line c.
~
- 1. Positive; winding 5-1 of relay U; contact 32-31 of relay P; 12-13
� of relay N; line c of the assembly; line c II/IVGI; negative.
The operating contact 11-12 of the relay U breaks the signal line, the -
signal frequency current does not go to the channel and in the outgoing
assembly the relay K does not operate. The busy circuit of the outgoing
assembly over line c is prepared through its quiescent contact 34-33.
The signal frequency is also not transmitted in the direction of the incom-
ing automatic affice.
If the trunk (the channel of the KRR equipment) is damaged on the incoming
automatic office, removed from the work area or left without ring-off _
_ II/IVGI, then the relay U in the RSLUMV assembly does not operate. The
contact 11-12 of the relay U closes the signal line, as a result of which
- the signal frequency current goes to the channel. In the RSLUMI ass2mbly _
the relay K responds and the contact 34-33 blocks the failed channel from
busy from the GIM direction. The contact 51-52 of the relay K closes the '
- signal tube circuit AS of the frame. After 1-2 minutes an individual -
signal appears of failure of the channel the AS tube burns.
Busy Assembly. The outgoing assembly and the high-frequency channel are
occupied by line c from the GIT1 direction. In the P.SLUM assembly the
ring-off relay 0 operates which, on responding, is blocked by the contacts -
31-33 and 54-55, and the contact 14-15 creates the circuit for sending the
signal f requency to the channel.
In the incoming assembly the relay RZ operates, and through its contact
34-35, the relay N. The contact 12-13 of the relay N breaks the operating
circuit of the relay U, and the contact 11-13 forms the operating circuit
of the test relay P. The latter responds and is blocked on its 60-ohm
= winding. The relay U releases and the contact 11-12 forms the sending
~ circuit of signal frequency in the direction of the long distance office.
- The relays K and V operate in the RSLUMI assembly.
In the busy state in the RSLUMI assembly the relays 0, K and V are under '
~ current; and in the RSLUMV, the RZ, N and P.
Number Dialing. When the number is dialed the relay I pulses in the RSLUPiI
asse:nbly. For the first dial pulse the series relay S responds and holds '
to the end of the series. Its contacts 11-12 and 13-14 disconnect Che
_ speaking line from the capacitors C4 and C5. For each response of the
relay I in the RSLUMV assembly the RZ relay releases, af ter which the -
obtained pulses turn out to be inverted.
126 _
~ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY _
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
The correction of the pulses and their further transmiasion to the
devices o~ the incoming automatic office take place analogously to how -
this was dascribed in item 9.2.
On completion of the establishment of connection, three cases are poasible:
1) The called subacriber is free; -
2) The called subscriber is busy with a local connection; _
3) The called subscriber is busy with a long distance connectinn.
Let us consider the operation of the assemblies in the enumerated cases.
Called Subscriber Free. After completion of estabZishment of the connec-
tion in the RSLUMV assembly the SB relay responds, receiving the negative
over the wire b from the LIM circuit. The contact 13-14 of this relay
breaks the signal line. In the RSLi.TPiI assembly the relay K releases, the
relay S responds, and then the relay OS. The latter, responding, closes -
its contact 54-55, through which it continues to hold after the conctact
53-54 breaks the operating circuit of the relay S. The contact 51-52 of
the relay OS removes the shunt from the transmitting speaking channel of
_ ths multiplexing equipment.
In the RSLUMV after response of the relay SB with delay the relay U
operates (the resistor Rp-8200 is included in parallel to its winding).
The operating contacts 11-12 of the relay SB and 51-52 of the relay U
create the operating circuit of the relay SA which receives a positive
over the line a from the LIM circuit. The relay SA, responding, is blocked
- in the local circuit through its contact 51-53. The contact 54-55 of the -
relay SA closes the signal line in the high-frequency channel, and in the
RSLUMI the relay K responds, through the contact of which 54-55 of the
aperating circuit of the relay SB is formed. The latter responds and -
is blocked. As a result of s~multaneous operation of the relays OS�and
SV, the polarity on the subscriber line changes: the winding of the -
relay I with positive is connected to line a, atid with ne~ative to line b.
_ With this polarity on the long distance switchboard the ring-off light of
the cord burns signalling the operator that the subscriber is free. The -
operator senda the ring-off.
_ Called Subscriber Is Busy with a Local Connection. In this case in the
incoming RSLUM assembly the relays SB and U respond, and relay SA does
not operate, for the positive of the battery from the LIM circuit is not
fed over the line a. The contacts 13-14 of the relay SB and 11-12 of relay
U break the signal line and the positive feed to the static relay of the
channel is stopped. In the outgoing RSLUM assembly, the relay K releases,
the relays S and OS respond. The contact 54-53 of the relay OS breaks
_ the operating circuit of the relay S, which releases. The winding of the
- relay I with battery ne~ative is connected to the line b, and the line a
127
FOR OFFICTAL US~ ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
I
is insulated, for the relay SV do.es not respond in case the called _
subscriber is busy, and its contact 13 -14 remains open.
With this polarity on the lines in the IGIPi direction on the long distance
switchboard the ring-off light of the cord blinks. The telephone operator,
receiving the signal that the subscriber is busy with a local connection,
- connects to the talking subscriber (by contact 51-52 of the relay OS the
shunt is picked up from the transmittin,g channel, and the subscriber
- hears the telephone operator), warning the required subscriber of the forth-
- coming long distance call, and if he agrees, "through clearing" takes
place by pressing the throu~h clearing button. In the RSLUMI assembly the ~
relay I responds, receiving the positive over the line b from the GIAi cir-
cuit. Through the operating contact 31-32 of relay I a positive is fed to
the pulse relay P located in the frame signal plate. The pulse relay -
responds, and by its contacts iC sends a pulsating positive to the static
relay. Ix~ the incoming RSLUM assembly the relays RZ and KI pulsate, the -
relay KS responds and by the contact 51-52 f eeds the positive of the battery
to the line b in the LIM. The relay SB in this case holds in the local
circuit. The LIM circuit is switched so that the called subscriber is
freed of the local connection and is held for the upcoming long distance
� connection.
~ If the subscriber hangs up after thrQUgh clearin~ the operator rings him. -
_ In this case in the RSLUMI assembly, a negative goes over the line a from -
GIM, the relay I responds which by its contact 31-32 trigger.s the general -
= frame pulse relay in the signal plate. In the RSLUr~4V assembly the relays -
_ RZ and KI pulsate, and to the completion of each sending the relay KS holds,
through the operating contacts of which the battery negative is f ed over
the line a to the LIM. The LIPi circuit provides for sending an.inductor -
current to the subscriber telephone.
When the subscriber answers, the SB relay is released in the RSI,UMV, for
- the battery negative feed stops over the line b from the LIM. The contact
11-12 of the relay SB breaks the operating circuit of the relay SA. The -
latter, on being released, brea.ks the signal line to the high-frequency
channel.
In the RSLiTl~1I assembly the relay K releases and the relay A responds.
- The polarity is picked up from the lines a and b. On the long distance
switchboard the ring-off light of the cord pair lights. The contact 33-34
of the relay A picks up the shunt from the transmitting speaking channel,
and the contact 13-14 breaks the signal line.
The relays RZ and N release in the RSLUMV circuit, but in the time of
delayed release of the relay N, the relay OT responds, through the contact .
of which the relays U and P continue to hold. -
~
During the conversation of the subscribers, the relays 0, V, A, OS, SV
~ operate in the RSLUMI, and the relays U, OT, P operate in the RSLUMV.
128 r
FOR OFFICIAL USR ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
_ The sequence of processes occurring during the ring-off in the RSLUMI
and the RSLUIN assemblies is the same as for the RSLUI and the itSLW
assemblies, and it is.not considered here.
If the subscriber is busy with a long distance connection, the assemblies
operate analogously to the case of busy with a local connection, but in -
addition to this a busy signal i~s sent from the LIM circuit.
9.4. Signa.l Plate of the RSLU-RSLUM Frame
Purpose of the Relay. The signal plate (Fig 9.9) contains the following
relays: ~
AS the signal relay operates on signalling from the outgoirbg assembly
= of failure of the high-frequency channel, failure of the grou~ selector _
at the opposite automatic orfice, delay of ring-off from the direction of
the calling subscriber;
PS signal relay operates when the frame protector burns out;
PP signal relay operates when the individual protector burns out;
- N and K-- time delay relays operate at the beginning and at the end of
the time interval required for the appearance of a damaged signal on the
frame, respectively;
, Bl blocking relay for operation of the assembly responds when the
plug is stuck in the test socket Isp. Gnl of the RSLUI assembly; -
P-- pulse relay sends current pulses over the high-frequency signal
channel to the incoming assembly for "cut-off."
Signalling Burnout of the Protectors. When the frame protector"burns out
the relay PS responds by both windings, receiving positive at the iocation
of the short circuit and negative through the good frame protector.
Responding, the relay PS is blocked by its contact 33-34, receiving the
_ positive independently from the initial circuit. The contact 51-52 of
the relay PS closes the row, section and graup signal circuits and the -
PS tubes on the RSLU frame.
- When the individual protector burns out on the frame of the outgoing
assemblies the signal contact of the protector ~?r closes the operating -
circuit of the relay PP. The contacts of the relay PP create the circuits
for the row, section, group signalling and the tube PP on the RSLU
~ frame. -
~
129 ~ ~
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY _
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
'~1~ CuaNanusauua cmamuBa PCAy - PCl1yM 3yM.3un (2) -
~~1
i�~D r~-?0 6n AC Ilr~c~3~~ '
11
~ 2A ZA RJ
n s.i
(4) ~ ~ s4
~n. num ~ i2 6n ~Z
- 6q o rt ~ ~
~T 1 np ~n T
6n ~ -
ZA p ~ '
_ S1 y
~ nn 11 ~ 6n f 6n 1a~~ AC AC s n n `
~ ac nc pa T R~ ~lU ~H.3y,a. 6)
10D0 ~ ~':'~Gd 7,4 ~ , _
J~~RC 4
_ . N ~o K ~
~ - ~N.3y~r 3
~ . . nC~ nri x~ nC nn K nh K~ 1 n Z Kn
IlC IIC H~~ ~ ac St 3y;~. 3yM
IG%UO 1000 r,~ z x H 7)
� J/ ~y ,f!
aon N K no~
(13 xc ~,z ~s4ts~~ nc nn Ac 1)
T 8) ~9 �
~p 6A ~p 6A ~
~12~ =.s~~ ~ 1> .
~ ~
Figure 9.9. Signal plate of the RSLU-RSLUM frame =
Key:
- 1. Signal system of RSLU-RSLUM frame
2. busy signal
3. Start
= 4. Gn. pit [power plugJ 11. 60 volts
5. PS 12. G1. Pr
6. Gn. Zum. 13. Kl.. PS -
7. K1. zum
8. PS
9. PP
10. AS
I
_ ,
- 130
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
- FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
Signalling Failure of the High-Frequency Channel or the II/IVGI Device
at the Opposite Automatic Office. On failure of the high-frequency channel
_ in the forward or return direction, absence or failure of II/IVGI at the
counter automatic office, the signal frequency current is not transmitted
to the outgoing automatic office. In the RSLUI assembly a positive appears
on the AS line, as a result of which the relay AS in the signal plate
responds.
1. Positive along the line AS from the RSLUI assembly; winding 2-1 of
the relay AS; negative.
The contact 31-32 of the relay AS prepares the operating circuit of the
relay N from the negative pulse of the 1-minute breaker 1':
2. Positive; contact 32-31 of the relay K; 32-31 of the relay AS;
14-13 of the relay N; winding 2-1 of the relay N; then the negative through
the breaker of the SVU.
= The relay N, responding, holds by the second winding through its contact
11-12 independently of the breaker. The contact 51-52 of the relay tJ
connects the winding of the relay K to the wire over which the positive
is fed also from the 1-minute breaker +1' from the SW. On expiration of
= another minute, when a positive appears on the wire +1', the relay K
responds by the circuit:.
3. Positive through the one-minute breaker; contact 51-52 of the relay N;
winding of the relay K-2000; negative. -
- By the contact 32-31 the relay K removes the shunt from the holding wind-
ing, and by the contacts 11-12 and 51-52 closes the circuits of the row or -
_ sectional signalling. On the frame the light AS burns. For discovery of
the independent channel it is necessary to press the button AS on the
_ frame. The button contacts connect the low-resistance winding AS-15 parallel
to the winding of the relay AS-2000, and the individual light of the assembly
burns.
The light AS burns on the frame of the outgoing RSLU even in the case where
the individual protector burns out on the incoming side of the channel
_ (in the RSLUV assembly). Then when the outgoing assembly is busy the
signal frequency current goes in the forward direction. In the incoming
assembly the relay RZ responds connected through the PSU of the channel.
The relay N cannot respond as a result of absence of the protector. As a
result, the signal frequency current does not go in the opposite direction.
For the first dial pulse, positive appears on the AS line in the outgoing
assembly. Further operation of the relay of the signal plate takes place
- analogously to what was described above.
Sending of Current Pulses over the High-Frequency Signal Channel to the
Incoming Assembly. When the long distance telephone operator presses the
"ring" button, the pulse relay P responds in the signal plate according to
the following circuit:
131
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
4. The positive from the outgoing assembly; the start P line; contact
14-13 of the relay P; winding 4-5; negative.
The relay P breaks the line to the high-frequency signal channel by the
contact 53-54, the sending of the signal frequency current in the forward
direction is stopped, and the relay RZ is released in the incoming assemb].y.
The relay P, responding, is deenergized by its contact 13-14, and by the
- contact 53-54 closes the signal wire to the channel.
In the RSLUVt~i assembly the relay RZ responds. Th~e quiescent contact 13-14
_ of the relay P again restores its operating circuit, and the process is -
repeated again.
Thus, the current pulses are sent through the contacts of the pulse relay
to the incoming RSLUI~IV assembly during the entire time until the button is
- pressed on the long distance switchboard. As a result, the battery positive
- is fed over the line b in the LIM direction, the circuitry of which in this
case insures "through clearing" of one subscriber and holding of the
_ connection to the line of the subscriber required for the long distance
_ conversation. ~
9.5. RSLU ATSK1Relay Assemblies
The RSLUI and the RSLUV ATSK relay assemblies are designed for matching the _
- multiplexing equipment with the equipment of the crossbar system.
The diagrams of the assemblies are presented in Figures 9.10 and 9.11. ~
The input of the outgoing RSLU assembly is connected to the field of the
GI stage or to the connecting assembly, and the output of the assembly is
connected to the multiplexing equipment. For connection to the GI f ield the
assembly has seven lines: a, b, e, f-- speaking; d-- busy line; c--
line marking disconnection of the differential system; k-- test line. The
assembly is connected to the multiplexing equipment by six lines: of them
four are speaking, and there are one each for transmitting and receiving
the control and interaction signals.
_ The incoming assembly is connected to the multiplexing equipment analogously _
and it .is connected directly to the vertical of the GI module (for opera-
tion of the ATSK with the ATSK) or through a connecting assembly (for _
operation of the ATS-DSh 10-step system with the ATSK crossbar system).
- The purpoSe of the lines a, b, e, f, d, c and k is the same as for the
outgoing assembly.
1Crossbar system.
132
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY -
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
Purpose of the Relays of the Outgoing Assembly.. 0-- ring-off relay
responds for busy and hold iantil the disconnect signal; �
I-- pulse relay included in the lines a and b;
- KI correct the dial pvises and transmit them over the signa line to
the high-frequency channel;
S-- series responds for the first dial pulse and holds for the entire
- series of puls~es, disconnects the separating capacitances from the pulse -
circuit;
K-- receiving relay receives the control and interaction signals
_ over the signal line from the multiplexing e.quipment;
V-- auxiliary relay to the 0 relay operates after obtaining the signal
frequency for busy incoming assembly, drops after ring-off from the
calling subscriber side;
A-- answer relay operates if there is an answer, releases on ring-off
from the direction of the calied subscriber, insures switching of the
- pulse of the wires a and b in the direction of the automatic office for
transmitting interaction signals;
PK blocking relay of the assembly in case of damage to the channel and -
auxiliary to the relay V, holds until the called subscriber answers;
SV signal relay receives the ring-off signal from the direction of
the calling subscriber and transmits it over the signal line to the high-
frequency channel;
DS relay for disconnecting the differential system responds when
_ establishing a tandem connection through the high-frequency chann,el.
Purpose of the Relays of the Incoming Assembly. 0-- ring-off responds
when the assembly is busy and holds for the entire connection;
VO auxiliary relay to the relay 0;
RZ receiving relay receives the control and interaction signals
over the signal line from the multiplexing equipment;
KZ corrects the number dialing pulses and transmits them to the subsequent
selection stage;
S-- series responds on the reception of the fist dial pulse and holds
for the entire series of pulses; _
133
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
rvn urrlVlesL uo~ viri.,i
- �w
_ '
_ ~ .w
~
JJ 0
~ a
d ca
anN~~'u~ouuh fl~~IL7DQDIIIID 8 ~ . ~o ~ ~
, phc~dap � , ~:andU . y
~ ~ , � ^ " `i Uf I 1~
v v ~~�e ~ I R1
y ' ~i C v N O~ r-I
N ~ ' . . N~ ~ ~ ~ ^ ~ -
~i e O v 1-I C+
t b . ~i n"' tl a ~(A I
~
_ , h ~ n ~ ~
h ~
~p' ~O 0 � ~ C w~- ~v ~--I tl'1 ~ ~"I
~ � ~ ~ ~ ~ N `~~1 ~'._w
~ � ~C (q
~ ~1 ~ ~ ~ N ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
~ M h ~n ti ~ n ~1~~ N t~ ~ ~ 'r~' u~ ~ ' ~A (A ~1 r"'I
~ rl o h ~ n r� tt~ ~ p ~ tA ~ N
~ I b~l h~ V~ h ~ i i I .O
~ a d ~ ~ ~ u
- ~ . � ~ ~
- ~ = _ v~ ~ a~
J t~. ti 4j f V tti C~ ~ ~ ~V Cl V ~
` b ~O ~l y h , ~O ~ . H 0~ b
~V
N . ~4 ~ ~ ~ w ~ I L~+ C~i ~
^ ` . N '4� P ' ~ � a C7 o c+~
r ,n ~ a~ I v~ H~I II
v ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~v I ~ I a ~
~`~a~ _ ~ , y o~ z . ~ 00 I G1 I
- ~ow y a ( C tY~.~,, O.~ r~l M 0! f
4 � ~"'S ~v Q f.l CV
N > O TH ~ C~i ~ ~~~.Iv~ ~ .w ~
V ~i' ~''TN Vy 4 a n n v�'a y ~ G! I � w
n n~ ~~'w p ' I Zi ~ ~O C I O U n O ~
, r~ ~ N~ Z ,ny O i.l
c~ ~ d ' y'^~
~N C~. ~ V L~O�, Y F~. J I ~ ~ ~
wc ~ ~ ~ I~~ ~ ~ ~ ~l
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ C~ N F~ 1~
~ ~ 4; h ~ x a, w
_ 1 tl ~ ~ h r N a N cd
C r
- ~
r 35 ~ a ~ ~ ; :e ~ '1 o~A e.~7 aa! ~-.ti ~
~ r! ~ a ~ I4ja ee ~'t I f~ 00 "~a r~-I
~
~~_N z ~w ~ ' tA r~l I
I ~ `O H>C 1 N
' ~ cr"' n'^ ~r d r-i
I r-1 '-I C)
` ~ ,,,I . b ~c p~
c~ i q ri A
N ~a r N i.~ � ~ U
v ~ ~ w ~ ~ 'b
' b ~O T! ~c V ~ ~ p~p ~ Q~
. � ti~l vNauBm~ . ~ ~ rn
, :v ~n t~ N II~
H O I
- . C.7 ~ f
I I
I I I
_ I I O ~~-i
r-1 ~O ~--I
- ~ .
Cl
~
_ 134 '
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFTCIAL USE ONLY
~
~
v
.a
u cr1
� N C+
b c~ z
- o
~
y; aNauh^~ DN ~ ~ H i
cd rn
4' ti, b vo ~ b I ri -
I ~ -
~ H
. ~ ~ ~ x -
h h h ~ ~
~ ~ ~Tr ~ ht ~ o e N ~ v ~
I ~ ~ � ~ ~z ~ ; h~`,o ~ ~ .o G o0
I T ~ ( 0 ~ 4 a ~n cd ~rl O r-I
01 'n ~ ~aa ~ S O ~ ~c ~ 1 ~ ~ U U
Z GJ N �
~O 0 y /'y .
O. N~,.. ~ o r, o�o p h ~ 00 'C �~I O
q q ~ 't7 D
Q '2 ~ ~n H a ~ ~ v 1~ v1
Q " c' V^ ~ t cti M 1 I
_ -~c~ V ~ ; ~ ~ N ~~o~9t ~ h h h ~ I I
~ v, s~ f~ ~ ~ o b ~h ~-1 II M ~
N~ 7 ~1
N ~ y~ ~ ~O b ~ 1"~ p"~
~'a ~ 0 w -
i0 O '7 d V ~ "
. ~ ~a~ ~ _~o ~T1 ~ ~
_ ~ ~ b _ _ ~ ~ n~ ~ � .C~ ~ 00 Gl D
4 .M. O 4G h n, ~ ~1 ~ I ~ ('~1 L~i
~ v n h ~ L V'' c,b O r- `3' ~~i'y ~ v V ~t ~ . n Li I
ul ~ f.~ O
~ ~ ~ o n h~ I n~' v ~d O a~ U r-1
N v h h ~ h O~ ~
O ~
w
h y ~ ti y' v '
i vj ~ f/) p) .~"a ~ G)
V h t N w^ 4 E-1 �rl 41 N 00
Z c a ~.T. w" 0 1~~..' ~ d' E3 ri cd
J m a~ 1~
~ Ty y ~ O _ v ' 0061 C r~-7 t~d ro UI ~
Q~ h ~n a ~ a O o
V] y.+ c~1 J.~ H
v ~ ea c , ~ �h. ~ ~ ' ~ ~ Pb. ~ CYi 1.1 ~ o C7 -
. ~a c~' o � ^ -
~ n Ct v ? ? o v u ~ , ~ I ~ ~ .C
h w e0 �p Q ~rl 1~Y ~1
^ ~ l ~ w L ..Cf e ~ ^ t~ N ~
_ ~ ~ 4 H '`O� ^ ~yE &'~j ~ J~ I
v I ~ �j Q ^ N ~ ~v � h ~c ~ ~ c' ~ ~ G 1
- ~ N 0 i0 ~ tl oo iD ^t cdi~ R ~ wt �p ~p ~ I~ O r-1
V ~n n ^a ~1 h"~ h ~ a�rl r'1 ul
p'^ h^ ` n o ~ I r-i M V1 r-I
q ~ I ( ~ O~ w ~ ~w ~ ~ i ~ CJ''r~ �w
~ J N ' Ol C~ N Q) 4-1 _
Q ~ ' ~ n ~ ~ ~ ~ O ~
~O ."y 'rl 1-I U b0 '
e., ~O o � ~ q ` ~ ~ N ~ y~.~ ~
. M r' '~i v' ~ ~ ri fS+ r-I I F+
~ v q J. ~ `~oo C]. I 1 _
c v C`r N a~.i ~O ~ c~'d
`
DhD~
p dd~ v W~1lQU ~ ~ F+ O N
nnNaNwauu~i ~idhutodDUUD g v ~ o
= ' ~ a~
~ ~ a, x
a�~ ~ ~ w
~
t ~ ~
~ ~ ~
a~ ~
~ ~
a~
~
135
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
.
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
SA signal receives the answer and ring-off signals of the called
subscriber, transmits the ring-off signal of the c;alling subscriber;
VSA control relay operates in the initial state of the assembly by -
the line k, controlling the state of repair of the GI and the marker, -
_ releases when the assembly is busy; _
DS relay for disconnection of the diff erential system responds when
. establishing the tandem connection through the multiplexing equipment
- channels.
_ Initial State. In the RSLUI all of the relays are deenergized, and in the
_ RSLUV, the VSA relay under current, which indica*es the state of good
repair of the GI input attached to the given assembly.
- When there is damage at the incoming end, the battery positive is fed to
_ the signal line in the direction of the multiplexing equipment by the
quiescent contact 14-15 of the relay VSA. In the RSLUI assembly the relay -
K responds, which by its contacts breaks the control circuit over the line k,
blocking the assembly from busy and switches on the blocking signal of the
_ assembly.
Busy Assembly. The test is made on tlne RSLUI assembly from the GI ::~age
over the line k. The free and good assembly is denoted by the pre~c:nce -
of a battery negative through 800 ohms with respect to the circuit:
Positive; test relay; line k of the marker of tihe GI stage; line to the
RSLUI assembly; contact 5-6 BKn; 13-14 of relay 0; 52-5~ of relay PK;
~ 11-12 of relay K; 32-33 of relay R4-800; negative.
Wkxen the RSLUI is busy, the relay 0 operates, receiving the battery positive
= along the line d f irst from the ARB circuit, then from the IShK circuit. -
~ The contact 14-15 of the relay 0 breaks the negative feed circuit to the
test line k, blocking the assembly from new busies, the contact 34-35 ~
closes the char~e circuit of the capacitor C6 (8 microfarads), and contact
- 54-55 provides for sending the audio frequency current to the channel. ~
_ In the RSLUV assembly the relay RZ responds which by the contact 51-53
closes the operating ci�rcuit of the ring-off relay 0. The latter, b~~
contact 31-33, closes the circuit for sending the signal frequency in the _
- opposite direction. The c~ntact 53-54 of the relay 0 breaks the operating
circuit of the relay VSA, but it continues to ho11 by its winding 1-2
_ through the contact 13-14 of the relay 0, the relay VSA, the relay RZ.
The contact 11-12 of the relay 0 closes the operating circuit of the relay
VO which, on responding, by the contact 34-35 makes the marker GI busy,
and the ~ontact 51-52 and 11-12 connects the linzs a and b. If the -
channel is good in both directions, then in the RSLUI the relay K responds _
and by the contact 14-15 closes the operating circuit of the relay V~.
. The latter, by the contact 14-15, connects the speak.ing channel, and by
- the contact 31-33, cl.oses the operating circuit of the PK relay.
- 136
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY - _
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
In the busy state in the outgoing assembly the relays 0, K, V, PK are
under current, and ;tn the incoming assembly, -VSA, RZ, 0, V0. -
If the high-frequency channel is failed, then the signal frequency does
not go in the forward or return direction, and the relay K in the RSLUI
does not respond. On arrival of the first pulse of the dialed number -
from the ARB (in the case wher.e the coupling is realized from the crossbar
to the 10-step system) the relay I responds and includes the series relay S.
The contact 51-52 of the relay I creates the operating circuit of the
relay PK, which, on responding, is blocked by its contact 51-53. The
, contacts 51-52 of the relay 0 and 54-55 of the relay PK connect the busy
signal to the winding 5-4 of the relay I which is induced in the line wind-
ings of this relay and is transmitted to the calling subscriber. The con-
tact 52-53 of the relay PK breaks the test circuit over the line k, and tne
contact 14-15 includes the signal of failure of the channel.
After ring-off of' the calling subscriber the RSLUI remains blocked from
the subsequent busies until the damage is eliminated.
_ The contact 32-33 of the relay PK closes the signal frequency current
sending circuit to the channel in the forward direction. After elimination -
of th~ damage the signal frequency is transmitted ~n Zhe return direction.
In thE RSLUI the relay K responds, the blocking circuit breaks for the
_ relay PK which, releasing, disrupts the signal frequency sending the cir-
cuit in the forward direction, as a result of which the sending of the
signal �~equency in the return direction stops. The relay IL releases, and
- the assembly returns to the initial state.
If a coupling is realized between the crossbar automatic office, thpn the
information between the register of the outgoing automatic office anc? the
marker of the incoming automatic office is transmitted by frequency code
over the speaking lines. In the case of failure of the channel the register
- of the outgoing automatic office does not receive interrogation from the
ma.rker of the incoming automatic office about the output of the correspond- -
ing digit of the number and on expiration of the time delay frees the
instruments participating in the connection. In the RSLUI assembly the
relay 0 is released. Through the quiescent contactsz 33-34 of the relay
_ 0 and 54-53 of the relay V in the di~charge circuit of the capacito*_- C6 -
(8 microfarads) the relay PK responds and is blocked by its contact 51-53.
The contact 32-33 of the relay PK closes the signal frequency sending the
_ circuit to the channel in the forward direction. Further operation of the
- circuit takes place analogously to that described. .
Dialing the Number. On connection from the ATSK to the ATS-DSh the informa-
tion is transmitted by the DC pulses over the lines a and b. Here the ~
_ relay I pulsates in the RSLUI. With the first pulse the relay S responds,
the contacts of which disconnect the separating the capacitors C4 and C5
from the puYse relay. The resistors R8, R9 are connected to the capacitors.
- 137
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
For the first release of the relay I in the capacitor discharge circuit
C6 (8 microfarads) the correcting relay KI responds. The time this relay -
is under current is determined by the discharge time of the capacitor C6
- and must be 40-45 milliseconds. This is achieved by regulating the
resistor R3-680 and varying the thickness of the stripped seal plate KI
from 0.1 to 0.3 mm. The contact 53-54 of the relay KI periodically
breaks the sending of the signal frequency current to the channel.
- In the RSLUV the RZ relay pulsatcs. When it first releases the capacitor
_ C~ is charged (8 microfarads). On subsequent response of the RZ relay
in the discharge circuit of the capacitor C~ the relay KI responds. The
time the relay I:I is under current is determined by the discharge time of -
the capacitor C~ and must be 40-45 milliseconds. This is achieved by
regulating the resistor R6-680 and varying the thiclmess of the stripped ~
seal plate of the relay KI. The relay KI, responding, closes the operating
circuit of the series relay S by the cantact 32-33, which holds for the
entire series of pulses. At the time of dropping of the KI relay the
relay S holds through the contact 31-32 of the relay RZ and its contact
32-33. Through the quiescent contacts 51-52 and 53-54 the relay KI the
~ corrected pulses are transmitted to the 10-step system devices. _
On completion of dialing the relay S releases, and the relay RZ responds
for a prolonged time. The rin~ing goes from the LI to the subscriber..
_ If the trunks are formed by two like ATSK, then the information about the _
_ dialed number is transmitted over the speaking lines by frequency code.
The pulsed �relay does not operate in this case. After completion of _
establishment of the connection the subscriber receives the ringing signal -
- from the circuitry of the incoming trunk outlet VShK.
Subscriber Answers. When the called subscriber answers as a re~ult of
- pole switching of the lines in the LI to the line a of the RSLUV the
battery positive is fed. The relay ON responds and by the contact 51-52
- opens the signal frequency sending circuit in the direction of the out-
going automatic office, by the conCact 11-12 closes the operating circuit
. of the winding 1-2 of SA and ~he blocking circuit of winding 1-2 of relay -
ON until the relay SA responds. .
In the RSLUI the relay K releases, but the relay V continues to hold the
armature through its contact 34-35 in series with the relay A. In this -
circuit the relay A responds and by the contact 31-33 shunts the winding ;
= 4-5 of the relay PK which responds with delay. For the t~me of the
- delayed release of the relay PK the pure positive f eed goes to the line a
through the contact 1~-13 of ~the relay PK, and after release of this relay
- the positive f eed is through the winding 1-2 of the relay SV. The G
contact 11-12 of the relay A breaks the signal frequency sending circuit
in the forward direction, as a result of which the relay RZ releases in
the RSLUV, and then the VSA relay.
138
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
- During the conversation in the RSLUI the relays 0, V, A are under current,
and in the RSLUV, the relays 0, V0, SA. -
Ring-off of the Calling Subscriber Direction. If the calling su~scriber
gives the ring-off first, then the battery ne~ative is fed to the line a
from the direction of the outgoing automatic office. In the RSLUI the -
relay SV responds, the contacts of which close the si~nal frequency sending
_ circuit. As a result, the called subscriber receives the "busy" signal
from the LI or the VShK circuit.
After ring-off of the called subscriber, the relay SA releases in the RSLW, -
the relay SB responds whi~h closes the signal frequency sending circuit in
- the opposite direction. The contact 14-15 of the relay SA creates the
operating circuit of the relay VSA. `
In the RSLUI the relay K responds which breaks the operating circuit of
= the relay A. The contact 14-15 of the relay A picks up the battery positive
from the line a, as a result of which the preceding cord instruments are
freed, and the contact 32-33 restores the operating circuit of the PK
relay. In the RSLUI, the relay 0 also releases, then the relay V with
delay and the operating circuit of the relay PK is broken. The ~ontact
- 54-53 of the relay 0 breaks the signal frequency feed to the channel in
- ` the forward direction; in the RSLW the relays RZ, SB, 0, V0, VSA release.
After freeing the GI, the operating circuit of the relay VSA is restored.
- The contact 14-15 of this relay stops the signal frequency sending to the
channel in the return direction. In the RSLUI, K releases, and the assembly -
is ready for a new busy. -
Ring-off from the Direction of the Called Subscriber. If the called
subscriber rings off first, then in the LI or VShK the positive is picked
up from the line a, and the negative is fed to the line b. In RSLW the
relay SA releases, and the relay SB responds. Through the contact 13-12
_ of the relay SA and 11-12 of the relay SB the signal frequency sending
circuit in the return direction is created.
In the RSLUI, K responds and by the contact 13-14 breaks the operating
circuit of the relay A. The relay A releases and by the contact 11-12
_ closes the signal frequency feed circuit to the channel; by the contact
32-33 the operating circuit of the relay PK is restored, and by the
contact 54-53 and 13-14 the windings of the relay I are connected to the
- lines a and b. Simultaneously the "busy" signal is sent in the direction
of the calling subscriber from the VShK or IGI. In the RSLW the relay -
RZ responds, and then VSA.
After ring-off of the calling subscriber and release of the preceding
- cord devices, the line d is broken. In the RSLUI the relay 0 releases,
then with delay V, and the operating circuit of the relay PK is broken.
After releasing of the relay 0, the signal frequency faed to the
- channel is stopped. In the RSLW the relay RZ releases, then 0, V0, VSA,
139
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
L'VL\ VL'L'1ViL1L lluy va~La
and SB. The contacts of the relay VO break the GI holding circuit. After ~
the release of the GI the relay VSA again responds, which breaks the
_ signal frequency sending circuit in the return direction. In the RSLIU
the relay K releases, and the assembly returns to the initial state. _
Tandem Connection Over the High-Frequency Channel. If when establishing
a tandem connection the RSLUI assembly is connected through the group
selector stage to the RSLW assembly, then a series circuit is created
- in the relay assemblies over the line c in which the relay DS of the out- -
going and incoming assemblies respond. In the iines a, b, e, f the
contacts of these relays disconnect the differential systems of the
= assemblies, and the speaking lines with a level at the commutation point _
of 3.47 decibels (0.4 nepers) are connected, that is, the four-line tandem
is created.
In order to match the ATSK equipment of the long distance cord to the
_ multiplexing equipment, the RSLUIM and the RSLUVM assemblies are used.
The operation of these assemblies can be considered by the circuits for _
the RSLUMI and the RSLUMV and the RSLU ATSK assemblies.
- Test Questions
l. What is the purpose and what are the types of RSLU assemblies?
2. Explain the structural diagram of the RSL-DS assembly.
- 3. Explain the process of the circular checking when the high frequency -
~ channel is busy by the circuits of the RSLU ATS-DSh.assemblies.
4. Explain the operation of the P.SLU ATS-DSh assemblies when a failed
channel is busy.
5. Explain the process of transmission of the number dialing pulses
over the high-frequency channel. -
,
6. What is the purpose and what is the operating principle of the pulse
corrector?
7. Explain the operation of the relay circuits when the called subscriber
answers aitd the speaking condition of the assemblies.
8. Explain the sequence of the processes occurring in the relay assemblies
if: 1) the calling subscriber rings off first; 2) the called subscriber
rings off first. .
9. How do the RSLtR~ assemblies operate when the good and failed channels -
. are busy?
- 140
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8

APPR~VED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8
#
~ FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
10. Explain the principle of the appearance of a signal at the long
distance switchboard in cases where: the subscriber is free, busy with
- a local call, busy with a long distance call.
11. Explain the operation of the as~embly during ring-off after a conversa-
tion has been held.
12. Explain the operation of the relay assemblies RSLU ATSK when the -
good and failed channels are busy. -
= 13. Explain the ~peration of the assemblies when dialing a number.
14. Explain the operation of the relay circuit when the called subscriber
' answers and the speaking condition of the assemblies. -
15. Explain the principle of establishing a tandem connection of automatic
office over the high-frequency ~elephony channels.
COPYRIGHT: Izdatel'stvo "Svyaz 1973
iua45 .
; CSO: 8344/064b E~ -
!
~
-
,
;
_
~ -
i
141
~
; FOR OFFICIAt USE ONLY
i
APPROVED FOR RELEASE: 2007/02/08: CIA-RDP82-00850R000200050060-8